NIKON

Coolpix P7800 - Camera NIKON - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free Coolpix P7800 NIKON in PDF.

📄 270 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice NIKON Coolpix P7800 - page 3
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about Coolpix P7800 NIKON

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Camera in PDF format for free! Find your manual Coolpix P7800 - NIKON and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Coolpix P7800 by NIKON.

USER MANUAL Coolpix P7800 NIKON

natural_image Line drawing of a Nikon digital camera with no text or symbols on the body

Introduction

Parts of the Camera and Main Functions

The Basics of Shooting and Playback

Shooting Features

Playback Features

Recording and Playing Back Movies

General Camera Setup

Connecting the Camera to a TV, Computer, or Printer

Reference Section

Technical Notes and Index

Introduction

Read This First

Thank you for purchasing the Nikon COOLPIX P7800 digital camera. Before using the camera, please read the information in "For Your Safety" (vii-ix) and familiarize yourself with the information provided in this manual. After reading, please keep this manual handy and refer to it to enhance your enjoyment of your new camera.

About This Manual

If you want to start using the camera right away, see "The Basics of Shooting and Playback" (20).

To learn about the parts of the camera and information that is displayed in the monitor, see "Parts of the Camera and Main Functions" (1).

Other Information

• Symbols and Conventions

To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and conventions are used in this manual:

Symbol Description
This icon indicates cautions and information that should be read before using the camera.
This icon indicates notes and information that should be read before using the camera.
These icons indicate other pages containing relevant information; ⚙: “Reference Section”, ⚙: “Technical Notes and Index.”

- SD and SDHC/SDXC memory cards are referred to as "memory cards" in this manual.

- The setting at the time of purchase is referred to as the "default setting."

- The names of menu items displayed in the camera monitor, and the names of buttons or messages displayed on a computer monitor appear in bold.

- In this manual, images are sometimes omitted from monitor display samples so that monitor indicators can be more clearly shown.

- Illustrations and monitor content shown in this manual may differ from the actual product.

Information and Precautions

Life-Long Learning

As part of Nikon's "Life-Long Learning" commitment to ongoing product support and education, continually updated information is available online at the following sites:

  • For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
  • For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
  • For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/

Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. Visit the site below for contact information:

http://imaging.nikon.com/

Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories

Nikon COOLPIX cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries and AC adapters) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.

THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE THE CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.

The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.

For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.

Holographic seal: Identifies this device as an authentic Nikon product.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories - 1

Before Taking Important Pictures

Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.

About the Manuals

  • No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means, without Nikon's prior written permission.
  • Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice.
  • Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.
  • While every effort was made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).

Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction

Note that simply being in possession of material that was digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera or other device may be punishable by law.

- Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced

Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped "Sample." The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited. Unless the prior permission of the government was obtained, the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited.

The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited.

- Cautions on certain copies and reproductions

The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also, do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies and private groups, ID cards and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.

The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books, music, paintings, woodcut prints, maps, drawings, movies, and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws. Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws.

Disposing of Data Storage Devices

Please note that deleting images or formatting data storage devices such as memory cards or built-in camera memory does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user's responsibility.

Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky) without attaching the GPS unit (available separately). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for the Select an image option in the

Welcome screen setting (99). Care should be taken to avoid injury or damage to property when physically destroying data storage devices.

For Your Safety

To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them.

The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Your Safety - 1

This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using this Nikon product, to prevent possible injury.

WARNINGS

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - WARNINGS - 1

Turn off in the event of malfunction

Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the camera or battery charger, unplug the battery charger and remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid burns. Continued operation could result in injury. After removing or disconnecting the power source, take the equipment to a Nikon-authorized service representative for inspection.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Turn off in the event of malfunction - 1

Do not disassemble

Touching the internal parts of the camera or battery charger could result in injury. Repairs should be performed only by qualified technicians. Should the camera or battery charger break open as the result of a fall or other accident, take the product to a Nikon-authorized service representative for inspection, after unplugging the product and/or removing the battery.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Do not disassemble - 1

Do not use the camera or battery charger in the presence of flammable gas

Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas, as this could result in explosion or fire.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Do not use the camera or battery charger in the presence of flammable gas - 1

Handle the camera strap with care

Never place the strap around the neck of an infant or child.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Handle the camera strap with care - 1

Keep out of reach of children

Particular care should be taken to prevent infants from putting the battery or other small parts into their mouths.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Keep out of reach of children - 1

Do not remain in contact with the camera, battery charger, or AC adapter for extended periods while the devices are on or in use

Parts of the devices become hot. Leaving the devices in direct contact with the skin for extended periods may result in low-temperature burns.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Do not remain in contact with the camera, battery charger, or AC adapter for extended periods while the devices are on or in use - 1

Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures, such as in an enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight

Failure to observe this precaution could cause damage or fire.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures, such as in an enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight - 1

Observe caution when handling the battery

The battery may leak, overheat, or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery for use in this product:

  • Before replacing the battery, turn the product off. If you are using the battery charger/AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.
  • Use only a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 (included). Charge the battery by using a Battery Charger MH-24 (included). For Remote Control ML-L3 (available separately), use only 3 V CR2025 lithium battery.

- When inserting the battery, do not attempt to insert it upside down or backwards.

- Do not short or disassemble the battery or attempt to remove or break the battery insulation or casing.

- Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat.

- Do not immerse in or expose to water.

- Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery. Do not transport or store with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins.

- The battery is prone to leakage when fully discharged. To avoid

damage to the product, be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains.

- Discontinue use immediately should you notice any change in the battery, such as discoloration or deformation.

- If liquid from the damaged battery comes in contact with clothing or skin, rinse immediately with plenty of water.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Observe caution when handling the battery - 1

Observe the following precautions when handling the battery charger

  • Keep dry. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock.
  • Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth. Continued use could result in fire.
  • Do not handle the plug or go near the battery charger during lightning storms. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
  • Do not damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the USB cable, place it under heavy objects, or expose it to heat or flames. Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed, take it to a Nikon-authorized service representative for inspection. Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
  • Do not handle the plug or battery charger with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
  • Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or

with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Observe the following precautions when handling the battery charger - 1

Use appropriate cables

When connecting cables to the input and output jacks, use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose, to maintain compliance with product regulations.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use appropriate cables - 1

Handle moving parts with care

Be careful that your fingers or other objects are not pinched by the lens cover or other moving parts.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Handle moving parts with care - 1

CD-ROMs

The CD-ROMs included with this device should not be played back on audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - CD-ROMs - 1

Using the flash close to your subject's eyes could cause temporary visual impairment.

The flash should be no less than 1 m (3 ft 4 in.) from the subject.

Particular care should be observed when photographing infants.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using the flash close to your subject's eyes could cause temporary visual impairment. - 1

Do not operate the flash with the flash window touching a person or object

Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Do not operate the flash with the flash window touching a person or object - 1

Avoid contact with liquid crystal

Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass and to

prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Avoid contact with liquid crystal - 1

Turn the power off when using inside an airplane or the hospital

Turn the power off while inside the aircraft during take off or landing.

Do not use wireless network functions while in the air.

Follow the instructions of the hospital when using while in a hospital.

The electromagnetic waves emitted by this camera may disrupt the electronic systems of the aircraft or the instruments of the hospital.

If you are using wireless network devices, remove them from the camera before boarding an aircraft or entering a hospital.

Notices

Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS -

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed.

The power supply unit is intended to be correctly orientated in a vertical or floor mount position.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will

not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

  • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
  • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
  • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
  • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement - 1

Nikon

COOLPIX P7800

CAUTIONS

Modifications

The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Interface Cables

Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment. Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING

Handling the cord on this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

Nikon Inc.,

1300 Walt Whitman Road,

Melville, New York 11747-3064

USA

Tel: 631-547-4200

Notice for Customers in Canada

Notices for Customers in Europe

CAUTIONS

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment is to be collected separately.

The following apply only to users in European countries:

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. - 1

  • This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste.
  • Separate collection and recycling helps conserve natural resources and prevent negative consequences for human health and the environment that might result from incorrect disposal.
  • For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management.

This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. - 2

The following apply only to users in European countries:

  • All batteries, whether marked with this symbol or not, are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste.
  • For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management.

Table of Contents

Introduction ...... ii

Read This First .... ii

About This Manual .... iii

Information and Precautions...... iv

For Your Safety ...... vii

WARNINGS ...... vii

Notices.... x

Parts of the Camera and Main Functions.... 1

The Camera Body.... 1

Principle Functions of the Controls 3

Attaching the Camera Strap....8

Attaching and Detaching the Lens Cap 8

Opening and Adjusting the Angle of the Monitor 9

Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder (☐) Button).... 10

Switching the Monitor Display (Fn2 Button) 11

Using Menus (the MENU Button).... 12

The Monitor 14

The Basics of Shooting and Playback.... 20

Preparation 1 Charge the Battery 20

Preparation 2 Insert the Battery 22

Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card 24

Internal Memory and Memory Cards.... 25

Approved Memory Cards.... 25

Step 1 Turn the Camera On....26

Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time.... 28

Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode.... 30

Available Shooting Modes 31

Step 3 Frame a Picture 32

Using the Zoom 33

Step 4 Focus and Shoot 34

Step 5 Play Back Images 36

Step 6 Delete an Image .... 37

Shooting Features.... 38

(Auto) Mode 38

Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes).... 39

Tips and Notes 40

Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting)...... 46

P, S, A, M Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting) 49

The Control Range of the Shutter Speed 53

U1, U2 and U3 (User Settings Modes) 55

Saving Settings in U1, U2 or U3 Mode (Save User Settings) 55

Functions That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector.... 58

Using the Flash....59

Using the Self-timer....62

Shooting Smiling Faces Automatically (Smile Timer)....63

Using Focus Mode....64

Taking Images with Manual Focus....66

Default Settings....67

Functions That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial 69

Adjusting Brightness (Exposure Compensation) 69

Functions That Can Be Set Using the 🔊 Button

(Quick Menu: When Shooting Still Images)....70

Basic Quick Menu Operations....70

Available Quick Menu 72

Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button

(Shooting Menu, Specialized Menu for U1, U2 or U3)....73

Shooting Menu....73

Specialized Menu for U1, U2 or U3....75

Functions That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously 77

Focusing....82

Focusing in (Auto) Mode or EFFECTS Mode 82

Using the Target Finding AF 82

Using Face Detection 83

Using Skin Softening....84

Subjects Not Suitable for Autofocus.... 84

Focus Lock....85

Playback Features....86

Playback Zoom 86

Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display....87

Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Playback Menu) 88

Using the Screen for Selecting Images 90

Recording and Playing Back Movies.... 91

Recording Movies 91

Functions That Can Be Set Using the 🔒 Button (Quick Menu: When Recording Movies) 95
Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Movie and Movie Custom Setting Menus)....96

Playing Back Movies 97

General Camera Setup.... 99

Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Setup Menu) 99

Connecting the Camera to a TV, Computer, or Printer.... 102

Connection Methods.... 102

Using ViewNX 2....104

Installing ViewNX 2 104

Transferring Images to the Computer 106

Reference Section ...... 🎨1

Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playback) ...... ⚙️2

Shooting with Easy Panorama....2

Viewing Images Captured with Easy Panorama.... 4

Viewing and Deleting Images Captured Continuously (Sequence)...... 7

Viewing Images in a Sequence 7

Deleting Images in a Sequence.... 8

Editing Still Images.... 9

Before Editing Images....9

Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and Saturation 10

D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast 10

Skin Softening: Softening Skin Tones.... 11

Filter Effects: Applying Digital Filter Effects 12

Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image 13

BK Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Images.... 14

Straighten: Compensating for Image Slanting 15

NRW RAW (NRW) Processing: Creating JPEG Images from NRW Images .... 🎨15

Crop: Creating a Cropped Copy 17

Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV)....18

Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)....20

Connecting the Camera to a Printer.... 20

Printing Individual Images.... 21

Printing Multiple Images 22

Editing Movies 25

Extracting Only the Desired Portion of a Movie.... 25

Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Image.... 26

The Quick Menu 27

QUAL Image Quality and Image Size 27

QUAL Movie Options 30

ISO ISO Sensitivity.... 33

WB White Balance (Adjusting Hue) 35

BKT Auto Bracketing (Continuous Shooting While Changing the Exposure and White Balance).... 38

Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control) (Changing the Settings for Image Recording)...... 40

The Shooting Menu (P, S, A or M Mode).... 44

Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control).... 44

Metering 45

Continuous Shooting 46

AF Area Mode.... 49

Autofocus Mode....53

Flash Exp. Comp. 54

Noise Reduction Filter 54

Built-in ND Filter....55

Distortion Control 55

Active D-Lighting 56

Zoom Memory....57

Startup Zoom Position 57

M Exposure Preview 58

Focus-coupled Metering 58

Commander Mode 59

The Playback Menu.... 62

Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order) 62

Slide Show 64

Delete 65

Protect....66

Rotate Image 66

Voice Memo....67

Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory Card)....68
Sequence Display Options....69
Choose Key Picture 69

The Movie and Movie Custom Setting Menus....70

Shooting Mode (Movie Custom Setting Only) 70
Custom Picture Control (Movie Custom Setting Only) 70
Autofocus Mode 71
Built-in ND Filter (Movie Custom Setting Only) 71
Wind Noise Reduction 72

The Setup Menu 72

Welcome Screen....72
Time Zone and Date 73
Monitor Settings 75
Print Date (Imprinting Date and Time on Images)....77
Self-timer: After Release 78
Vibration Reduction....79
AF Assist 80
ISO Sensitivity Step Value 80
Digital Zoom 81
Zoom Speed 82
Fixed Aperture 82
Sound Settings 83
Record Orientation 83
Rotate Tall 84
Auto Off 84
Format Memory/Format Card 85
Language 85
TV Settings.... 86
External Mic Sensitivity 86
Customize Command Dials 87
Command Dial Rotation 87
Multi Selector Right Press 88
Delete Button Options 88
AE/AF Lock Button 89
Fn1 + Shutter Button.... 90
Fn1 + Command Dial/Fn1 + Selector Dial.... 91
Fn1 Guide Display.... 92
Fn2 Button 92
Customize My Menu....93
Reset File Numbering....94

Accessory Terminal 95

Eye-Fi Upload....96

MF Distance Indicator Units 97

Reverse Indicators 97

Flash Control 97

Reset All....98

Firmware Version 98

Error Messages.... 99

File Names 103

Optional Accessories 104

Shooting with Remote Control ML-L3 106

Speedlights (External Flash Unit) 108

How to Attach the Speedlight/Wireless Speedlight Commander....108

Using the GPS Unit 113

How to Attach the GPS Unit.... 113

Recording GPS Data on Images.... 113

Technical Notes and Index....1

Caring for the Products.... 2

The Camera.... 2

The Battery .... 3

The Battery Charger.... 4

Memory Cards....5

Caring for the Camera....6

Cleaning....6

Storage 7

Parts of the Camera and Main Functions

The Camera Body
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Parts of the Camera and Main Functions - 1

text_image 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 8 1 Nikon Nikon 4 20 19181716141312 1511

1 Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1 108
2 Accessory shoe 108
3 Flash 59
4 Microphone (stereo) .....88, 91
5 Eyelet for camera strap 8
6 Exposure compensation dial ..... 69
7 Exposure compensation dial mark....69
8 Shutter-release button ..... 4, 34
9 Mode dial 30
10 Infrared receiver (for optional Remote Control ML-L3)....58, 106
11 Lens ring....105
12 Lens
13 Self-timer lamp....62 AF-assist illuminator....99

14 Fn1 (function 1) button .....4, 100 Zoom control .....33

W : wide-angle....33 T : telephoto....33

:thumbnail playback....87 ? : playback zoom ....86 ? : help....39

16 Sub-command dial .....3, 6, 49, 51

17 Fn2 (function 2) button 11, 101

18 Power connector cover (for optional AC adapter) ..... 104

19 USB/audio/video output connector ....102

1 External microphone connector .... 104
2 Eyelet for camera strap......8
3 ↕ (flash pop-up) control .....59
4 Electronic viewfinder......10
5 Diopter adjustment control......10
6 |□| (monitor) button....10
7 (quick menu) button ..... 70, 95
8 Power switch/power-on lamp ....26
9 Main command dial .....3,6,49,51
10 AE-L (AE-L/AF-L) button 4, 100
11 ▶ ( playback) button......36

12 Rotary multi selector (multi selector)*.... 3,6,58
13 OK (apply selection) button 3,6,12
14 Battery-chamber/ memory card slot cover...... 22, 24
15 Tripod socket
16 (delete) button .....37, 98, 100
17 MENU (menu) button ....12, 73, 88, 96, 99
18 Monitor....9, 11, 14
19 Speaker....88, 97, 100
20 Accessory terminal ....101, 🎨95, 🎨104

Principle Functions of the Controls

For Shooting

Control Main Function
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 1Mode dialChange the shooting mode. 30
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 2Zoom controlMove toward T (Q) (telephoto) to zoom in closer to the subject, and move toward W (☐) (wide-angle) to zoom out and view a larger area.33
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 3Multi selectorWhile the shooting screen is displayed: Display the following setting screens by pressing:- U p (▲): (flash mode)- Left (◀): (self-timer/smile timer/remote control)- Down (▼): (focus mode)- Right (▶): (AF area mode)While the setting screen/quick menu is displayed: Select an item using ▲▼◀▶ or by rotating the multi selector; apply the selection by pressing the OK button.5812, 70, 95
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 4Main command dialWhen the shooting mode is P:Set the flexible program.When the shooting mode is S or M:Set the shutter speed.While the setting screen is displayed: Select an item.While the quick menu is displayed: Select an item on the left or right.49, 5149, 511270, 95
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 5Sub-command dialWhen the shooting mode is A or M:Set the aperture value.While the setting screen is displayed: Move between menu levels.While the quick menu is displayed: Select an item above or below.49, 511270, 95

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 6

Control Main Function
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 7(quick menu) buttonDisplay or exit the quick menu. 70, 95
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 8MENU (menu) buttonDisplay and hide the menu.12, 73, 96, 99
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 9 NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 10Shutter-release buttonWhen pressed halfway (i.e., if you stop pressing when you feel resistance slightly): Set focus and exposure.When pressed all the way (i.e., if you press the button all the way down): Release the shutter.34, 35
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 11Exposure compensation dialAdjust the brightness (exposure compensation).69
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 12AE-L/AF-L buttonLock the exposure or focus.85, 100
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 13Fn1 (function 1) button·When the zoom control is moved while pressing this button: Change the zoom lens focal length.·When the shutter-release button is pressed while pressing this button: Shoot with the setting assigned in Fn1 + shutter button.·When the command dial is rotated while pressing this button: Set the function assigned in Fn1 + command dial.·When the multi selector is rotated while pressing this button: Set the function assigned in Fn1 + selector dial.74100100101
Control Main Function
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 14Fn2 (function 2) buttonSwitch the information displayed in the monitor.Set the function assigned in Fn2 button.11101
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 15|□| (monitor) buttonSwitch between the monitor and viewfinder.10
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 16▶ ( playback) buttonPlay back images. 36
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 17⇨ (delete) buttonDelete the last image that was saved. 37

For Playback

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 1

Control Main Function
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 2▶ ( playback) buttonWhen the camera is turned off, press and hold this button to turn the camera on in playback mode.Return to shooting mode.3636
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 3Zoom controlMove toward T (Q) to zoom in on the image, and move toward W (☐) to display images as thumbnails or the calendar.Adjust the volume for voice memo and movie playback.86, 8788, 97
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 4Multi selectorWhile the playback screen is displayed: Change the displayed image using up (▲), left (◀), down (▼), right (▶), or by rotating the multi selector.While the setting screen is displayed: Select an item using ▲▼◀▶ or by rotating the multi selector.While an enlarged image is displayed: Move the display area.361286
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 5OK (apply selection) buttonDisplay individual images of a sequence in full-frame playback mode.Scroll an image shot with Easy panorama.Play back movies.Switch from thumbnail playback or zoomed image display to full-frame playback.While the setting screen is displayed, apply the selection.89,○○○744,○○○49786, 8712
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 6Main command dialSelect images and date. 36, 87Switch the magnification of an enlarged image.86
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 7Sub-command dial
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 8MENU (menu) buttonDisplay and hide the menu. 12, 88
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 9(delete) buttonDelete an image. 37
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 10Fn2 (function 2) buttonSwitch the information displayed in the monitor.11
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 11|☐| (monitor) buttonSwitch between the monitor and viewfinder. 10
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 12Shutter-release buttonReturn to shooting mode. -

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 13

Attaching the Camera Strap

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Attaching the Camera Strap - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Step 1: Disassembly of Cable Clamp"] --> B["Step 2: Disassembly of Cable Clamp"]
    B --> C["Step 3: Disassembly of Cable Clamp"]
    C --> D["Step 4: Disassembly of Cable Clamp"]
    D --> E["Final Capture with Camera"]

Attach the strap at two places.

Attaching and Detaching the Lens Cap

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Attaching and Detaching the Lens Cap - 1

text_image .Nikon Nikon

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Attaching and Detaching the Lens Cap - 2

Lens Cap

At times when you are not shooting images, attach the lens cap to the lens to protect it.

Opening and Adjusting the Angle of the Monitor

The orientation and tilt of the monitor can be changed. This is useful when shooting with the camera in a high or a low position, or when taking self-portraits.

For normal shooting, fold the monitor against the camera body with the screen facing out (③).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Opening and Adjusting the Angle of the Monitor - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Step ①: Display with scroll arrow"] --> B["Step ②: Rotation to flat screen"]
    B --> C["Step ③: Display with scroll arrow"]

When you are not using or carrying the camera, fold the monitor against the camera body with the screen facing inward to prevent scratches or contamination.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Opening and Adjusting the Angle of the Monitor - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a Nikon DSLR camera with no visible text or symbols on the body

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Opening and Adjusting the Angle of the Monitor - 3

Notes About the Monitor

- When moving the monitor, do not apply excessive force and turn slowly within the monitor's adjustable range so that the connection will not be damaged.

- When the monitor is turned with a cable connected to the external microphone connector or accessory terminal, the monitor may catch on the cable or cover. Do not apply excessive force to the cable or to the connector of the camera.

Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder (|□| Button)

You can use the viewfinder when bright light under the open sky makes it difficult to see the monitor.

Each press of the |□| button switches the display between the monitor and viewfinder.

- When you fold the monitor against the camera body with the screen facing inward, the display in the monitor is switched to the viewfinder.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder (|□| Button) - 1

text_image Viewfinder □ (monitor) button

Diopter Adjustment of the Viewfinder

When the image in the viewfinder is difficult to see, adjust by rotating the diopter adjustment control while looking through the viewfinder.

• Take care not to scratch your eye with your fingertips or nails.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Diopter Adjustment of the Viewfinder - 1

text_image OXY/EX FIRE QUALITY FIRE

Diopter adjustment control

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Diopter Adjustment of the Viewfinder - 2

Notes About Checking and Adjusting Image Colors

Use the monitor on the back of the camera because the monitor has higher color reproducibility than the viewfinder.

Switching the Monitor Display (Fn2 Button)

To switch the information displayed in the monitor during shooting and playback, press the Fn2 (function 2) button.

- This operation is available when Fn2 button (101) in the setup menu is set to Show/hide info (default setting).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching the Monitor Display (Fn2 Button) - 1

text_image Fn2

For Shooting

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 1

text_image P 1/250 F5.61/250:30

Show information Display the image and the shooting information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 2

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Shooting - 3

natural_image Illustration of a person by the sea with a sailboat and mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

Hide information Display the image only.

For Playback

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Show information\nDisplay the image and photo information."] --> B["Tone level information\n(except movies)\nDisplay a histogram, tone level and shooting information (19)."]
    B --> C["Hide information\nDisplay the image only."]

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 2

Virtual Horizon, Histogram and Framing Grid Displays for Shooting

You can set the virtual horizon, histogram or framing grid (16) to be displayed by selecting Monitor settings in the setup menu (99) followed by Photo info.

Using Menus (the MENU Button)

Use the multi selector and ⓄK button to navigate the menus.

1 Press the MENU button.

- The menu that matches the status of the camera, such as shooting or playback menu, is displayed.

Unavailable menu items are displayed in gray and cannot be selected.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the MENU button. - 1

text_image 1/250 5:51 7:00:00 MENU

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the MENU button. - 2

text_image Shooting menu Custom Picture Control Metering Continuous AF area mode Autofocus mode Flash exp. comp. Noise reduction filter AF-S 0.0 NR

2 Use the multi selector to select a menu item.

  • ▲▼ or rotation: Select an item above or below.
  • ◀▶: Select an item on the left or right, or move between menu levels.
  • OK: Apply a selection. Pressing ▶ also applies a selection.
    • See ☐13 for more information on how to switch tabs.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector to select a menu item. - 1

natural_image Circular diagram with directional arrows and a 'OK' button, no readable text or symbols beyond the icon itself.

Apply selection

3 After completing the settings, press the MENU button or shutter-release button.

- Press the shutter-release button to display the shooting screen.

Notes About the Command Dial Operation When a Menu is Displayed

Rotating the main command dial when a menu is displayed allows you to select an item. Rotating the sub-command dial allows you to move between menu levels.

Switching Among Menu Tabs

To display a different menu, such as the setup menu (☐99), use the multi selector to switch to another tab.

Tabs
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 1

text_image Shooting menu Custom Picture Control -- Metering Continuous AF area mode Autofocus mode Flash exp. comp. Noise reduction filter

Use ◀ to move to the tabs.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 2

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 3

text_image Shooting menu Custom Picture Control Metering Continuous AF area mode Autofocus mode Flash exp. comp. Noise reduction filter

Use ▲▼ to select a tab, and press the ⓄK button or ▶ to apply the selection.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 4

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 5

text_image Set up P Welcome screen -- Time zone and date -- Monitor settings -- Print date OFF Self-timer: after release ON Vibration reduction ON AF assist AUTO

Tab Types

For Shooting For Playback
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 6NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 7NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 8NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Switching Among Menu Tabs - 9
P tab:Displays the settings available for the current shooting mode (31).Depending on the current shooting mode, the tab icon that is displayed will be different. In (auto) mode, only Y tab is displayed.U1/U2/U3 tab:Displays the settings for the specialized menu in U1,U2 or U3 mode (55).▶ tab:Displays the settings available for the playback mode.
Y tab:Displays the setup menu, where you can change general settings.

The Monitor

The information that is displayed in the monitor during shooting and playback changes depending on the camera's settings and state of use. Press the Fn2 button to show or hide the information in the monitor (11).

For Shooting
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Monitor - 1

text_image 45 S01 S20 S1 44 43 B01 B01 5V B01 B01 5R 42 H0X1 H0X2 H0X3 41 120 50 80s 1m 5m 10s 40 H2E 5E 1 2 3 40 K 39 SO NL EWI YC CI 62 37 F0H N L 35 H11 2 1/25.0 33 32 31 30 4 5 6 7 8 3 AF P O10 W VI R +1.0 +200 AUTO + 30 NRE DATE > NOR 18 19 20 DATE DATE 21 22 23 24 [1m 0s] [ 1m 0s] FINE NORM HNA KRA 25 26 27

1 Shooting mode....30, 31
2 Focus mode......65
3 Focus indicator....34
4 Quick menu icon....70, 95
5 Zoom indicator....33, 65
6 Zoom memory 74
7 Zoom speed setting....99
8 AE/AF-L indicator..... 100, 📄6
9 Flash mode ....59
10 Speedlight....61
11 Flash exp. comp....74
12 Battery level indicator 26
13 Vibration reduction icon....99
14 Eye-Fi communication indicator.... 101, 📞96
15 Distortion control .....74
16 GPS reception 101, 📄114
17 Noise reduction filter .....74
18 Wind noise reduction....97
19 "Date not set" indicator......28, 99
20 Travel destination icon .....99
21 Print date....99
22 Metering....73
23 Fn1 guide display....4, 101
24 Movie recording time remaining....91, 92
25 Image quality....72

26 Image size....72
27 Easy panorama....44
28 Movie options (normal speed movies)....95
29 Movie options (HS movies) ..... 95
30 Number of exposures remaining (still images)....26, 📐28
31 Internal memory indicator ...... 26
32 Aperture value 49
33 Shutter speed 49
34 Exposure indicator.... 51
35 ISO sensitivity....72,95
36 Exposure compensation value ... 69
37 Active D-Lighting 74
38 Built-in ND filter 74
39 COOLPIX Picture Control..... 72, 95
40 White balance 72,95
41 Continuous shooting mode 45,73
42 Backlighting (HDR) 43
43 Auto bracketing 72
44 Hand-held/tripod...... 41
Self-timer indicator....62
Remote control.... 58
45 Smile timer 63
Pet portrait auto release...... 45

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Monitor - 2

text_image P QUAL NR [ ] 1/1200 F2.8 NEAR/ T2500 [ ] [ ] 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Monitor - 3

text_image P QUAL 8 [ ] 1/1200 F2.8 [1 280]

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Monitor - 4

text_image P SUML 9 1/1200 F2.8 1280

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Monitor - 5

text_image 10 1/1200 F2.8 1280

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Monitor - 6

text_image P QLM NR 11 1/1200 F2.8 1280 J

1
Focus area (for center) 58, 67, 73, 85
2
Focus area (for manual) ....41, 42, 58, 67, 73
3
Focus area (auto, target finding AF)....58, 67, 73, 82
4
Focus area (face detection, pet detection) ..... 45, 58, 63, 67, 73, 83
5
Focus area (subject tracking) .... 58, 67, 73, 📞 51
6
Spot metering area....73
7
Center-weighted area .....73
8
Virtual horizon (bars) .... 11, 99, 📐75
9
Virtual horizon (circle) .... 11, 99, 📐75
10
View/hide histograms 11, 99, 📐75
11
View/hide framing grid 11,99,75

For Playback

Full-frame playback (36)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 1

text_image 15/11/2013 12:00 9999/JPG 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 161718 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 NORM 1112 NORM 13 14 [999/999] 1m 0s [9999/9999] 1m 0s

a
b

1 Date of recording.... 28
2 Time of recording...... 28
3 Voice memo indicator...... 88
4 Battery level indicator...... 26
5 Protect icon....88
6 Eye-Fi communication indicator....101, 📞96
7 Recorded GPS information indicator.... 101, 📞113
8 Small picture icon 88
9 Crop icon....86
10 Print order icon.... 88
11 Image quality....72
12 Image size 72
13 Movie options 95, 97
14 Easy panorama indicator...... 44

15 number of images
(b) Movie length
16 Internal memory indicator...... 25
Easy panorama playback guide ......6, 44 , 🎨4
17 Sequence playback guide 6, 37, 🎨7
Movie playback guide...... 97
18 Volume indicator....88, 97
19 Black border icon 89
20 D-Lighting icon.... 88
21 Quick retouch icon.... 88
22 Filter effects icon 88
23 Straighten icon 89
24 Skin softening icon 88
25 Sequence display (when Individual pictures is selected) .....89, 📞69
26 File number and type.....103

Tone level information display ^1 (11)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - For Playback - 2

text_image ISO 80 +1.0 W3 AUTO1 1 2 3 4 5 GUAL NORM 11 10 P 1/250 F5.6 [ 4/132 ] 9 8 7 6

1 ISO sensitivity....72
2 Exposure compensation value...69
3 White balance 72
4 COOLPIX Picture Control..... 72
5 Image quality/Image size...... 72

6 Current image number/total number of images
7 Aperture value...... 49
8 Shutter speed....49
9 Shooting mode ^2 31
10 Tone level 3
11 Histogram ^4

1 You can check for loss of contrast detail in highlights and shadows from the histogram that is displayed, or the flashing display for each tone level. These provide guidelines when adjusting the image brightness with functions such as exposure compensation.
2 P is displayed when the shooting mode 📄, SCENE, EFFECTS or P is selected.
^3 The tone level indicates the brightness level. When the tone level to check is selected using the multi selector ◆, the area of the image that corresponds to the selected tone level flashes.
4 A histogram is a graph showing the distribution of tones in the image. The horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness, with dark tones to the left and bright tones to the right. The vertical axis shows the number of pixels.

The Basics of Shooting and Playback

Preparation 1 Charge the Battery

1 Prepare the included battery charger.

If a plug adapter* is included with your camera, attach the plug adapter to the plug on the battery charger. Push the plug adapter firmly until it is securely held in place. Once the two are connected, attempting to forcibly remove the plug adapter could damage the product.

* The shape of the plug adapter varies according to the country or region in which the camera was purchased.

This step can be omitted if the plug adapter comes permanently bonded to the battery charger.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Prepare the included battery charger. - 1

natural_image Illustration of a rectangular electronic component with a small internal component (no text or symbols)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Prepare the included battery charger. - 2

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with a plug inserted into a housing (no text or symbols)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Prepare the included battery charger. - 3

natural_image Technical illustration of a mechanical component with a central pin and housing (no text or symbols)

2 While pushing in the battery (①), set it into the battery charger (②).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - While pushing in the battery (①), set it into the battery charger (②). - 1

natural_image Diagram of a device internal component with a black arrow indicating a directional flow (no text or symbols present)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - While pushing in the battery (①), set it into the battery charger (②). - 2

text_image ② Mikron

3 Plug the battery charger into an electrical outlet.

- CHARGE lamp starts flashing when charging starts.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Plug the battery charger into an electrical outlet. - 1

text_image CHARGE lamp
CHARGE lamp Description
Flashes The battery is charging.
OnThe battery is fully charged.About 1 hour and 30 minutes are required to charge a fully exhausted battery.
Flashes quickly·The battery is set incorrectly. Disconnect the battery charger from the electrical outlet, remove the battery, and then reset the battery to lie flat in the battery charger.·The ambient temperature is not suited to charging. Charge the battery indoors with an ambient temperature of 5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F).·There is a problem with the battery. Immediately disconnect the battery charger from the electrical outlet, and stop charging. Take the battery and battery charger to your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.

4 When charging is complete, remove the battery and then disconnect the battery charger from the electrical outlet.

Preparation 2 Insert the Battery

1 Open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preparation 2 Insert the Battery - 1

text_image CARD BATTERY ① ②

2 Insert the battery.

  • Push the orange battery latch in the direction indicated by the arrow (①), and fully insert the battery (②).
  • The battery locks into place when inserted correctly.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preparation 2 Insert the Battery - 2

text_image Diagram of a car interior showing directional arrows labeled ① and ②, indicating movement or flow in a vehicle's dashboard.

Battery latch

Be Careful to Insert the Battery in Correct Direction

Inserting the battery upside down or backwards could damage the camera.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preparation 2 Insert the Battery - 3

text_image Nikon

3 Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.

- While the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover is open, the camera cannot be turned on.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preparation 2 Insert the Battery - 4

text_image CARD BATTERY ① ②

Removing the Battery

Turn the camera off and make sure that the power-on lamp and the monitor have turned off, and then open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.

Move the battery latch in the direction indicated by the arrow (①) to eject the battery (②).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Removing the Battery - 1

text_image Diagram of a device interior with numbered components and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Removing the Battery - 2

High Temperature Caution

The camera, battery, and memory card may be hot immediately after using the camera.

Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card

1 Turn off the camera and open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card - 1

text_image CARD BATTERY ① ②

2 Insert the memory card.

- Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place.

Memory card slot

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card - 2

natural_image Diagram of a printer's internal structure with a magnified view showing a printer attachment (no text or symbols present)

Be Careful to Insert the Memory Card in Correct Direction

Inserting the memory card upside down or backwards could damage the camera and the memory card.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card - 3

text_image NO LOOK

3 Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card - 4

text_image GARD BATTERY ① ②

V Formatting Memory Cards

The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device into this camera, make sure to format it with this camera. Insert the card into the camera, press the MENU button, and select Format card in the setup menu.

Removing Memory Cards

Turn the camera off and make sure that the power-on lamp and the monitor have turned off, and then open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.

Gently push the memory card into the camera (①) to partially eject the card (②).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Removing Memory Cards - 1

text_image Diagram of a device interior with numbered annotations indicating component locations

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Removing Memory Cards - 2

High Temperature Caution

The camera, battery, and memory card may be hot immediately after using the camera.

Internal Memory and Memory Cards

Camera data, including images and movies, can be saved either in the camera's internal memory or on a memory card. To use the camera's internal memory, first remove the memory card.

Approved Memory Cards

The following Secure Digital (SD) memory cards have been tested and approved for use in this camera.

- Memory cards with an SD Speed Class rating of 6 or faster are recommended for recording movies. When using a memory card with a lower Speed Class rating, movie recording may stop unexpectedly.

SD memory cardsSDHC memory cards ^2 SDXC memory cards ^3
SanDisk 2 GB14 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB64 GB, 128 GB
TOSHIBA-4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB64 GB
Panasonic 2 GB14 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB64 GB
Lexar-4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB64 GB, 128 GB

1 If the memory card will be used with a card reader or similar device, make sure that the device supports 2 GB cards.

2 SDHC-compliant. If the memory card will be used with a card reader or similar device, make sure that the device supports SDHC.

3 SDXC-compliant. If the memory card will be used with a card reader or similar device, make sure that the device supports SDXC.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Approved Memory Cards - 1

- Contact the manufacturer for details on the above cards. We cannot guarantee camera performance when using memory cards made by other manufacturers.

Step 1 Turn the Camera On

1 Open the monitor and remove the lens cap.

  • See "Opening and Adjusting the Angle of the Monitor" (☐9) for more information.
  • See "Attaching and Detaching the Lens Cap" (8) for more information.

2 Press the power switch.

- If you are turning the camera on for the first time, see "Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time" (28).

• The monitor turns on.
• To turn the camera off, press the power switch again.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the power switch. - 1

text_image ON/ OFF

3 Check the battery level indicator and the number of exposures remaining.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Check the battery level indicator and the number of exposures remaining. - 1

text_image Battery level indicator Number of exposures remaining 1/250 PS 55.6 (1280)

Battery level indicator

Display Description
☐ The battery level is high.
☐ The battery level is low.
iBattery exhausted.The camera cannot capture images. Recharge the battery.

Number of Exposures Remaining

The number of images that can be taken is displayed.

- IN is displayed when no memory card is inserted in the camera, and images are saved in the internal memory.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Number of Exposures Remaining - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Camera with screen"] --> B{No operations performed}
    B --> C["Flash generation"]
    C --> D["3 min on standby mode"]
    D --> E["Camera turns off.Car"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
  • The time that elapses before the camera enters standby mode is about 1 minute. The time can be changed using the Auto off setting in the setup menu (99).
  • While the camera is in standby mode, the monitor turns back on if you perform any of the following operations:

  • Press the power switch, shutter-release button, or ▶ button.

  • Rotate the mode dial.
  • Open or close the monitor.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Number of Exposures Remaining - 2

Monitor Display

Press the Fn2 button to switch between showing and hiding the photo information or shooting information that is displayed in the monitor (11).

Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time

When the camera is turned on for the first time, the language-selection screen and the date and time setting screen for the camera clock are displayed.

- If you exit without setting the date and time, Ⓧ will flash when the shooting screen is displayed.

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired language and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time - 1

text_image OK

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time - 2

text_image Language Български Čeština Dansk Deutsch English Español MENU Cancel

2 Select Yes and press the Ⓞ button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time - 3

text_image Time zone and date Choose time zone and set date and time? Yes No MENU Cancel

3 Select your home time zone and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time - 4

text_image OK

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time - 5

text_image London Casablanca MENU Back

• To enable daylight saving time, press ▲. When the daylight saving time function is enabled, ⚙️ is displayed above the map.

To turn off the daylight saving time function, press ▼.

4 Select the date format and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time - 6

text_image Date format Y/MO Year/Month/Day M/D/Y Month/Day/Year D/M/Y Day/Month/Year

5 Set the date and time, and press the ⓄK button.

  • Select a field: Press ◀▶ (changes between D, M, Y, hour, and minute).
  • Edit the date and time: Press ▲▼. Date and time can also be changed by rotating the multi selector or main command dial.

- Confirm the setting: Select the minute field and press the OK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Set the date and time, and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image Date and time D M Y 15 11 2013 15 : 10 Edit

6 Select Yes and press the Ⓞ button.

- When settings are finished, the lens extends and the camera switches to shooting mode.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select Yes and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image Date and time 15/11/2013 15:10 OK? Yes No

Changing the Language Setting and the Date and Time Setting

  • You can change these settings using the Language and Time zone and date settings in the ⚙ setup menu (☐99).
  • You can enable or disable daylight saving time in the ⚙ setup menu by selecting Time zone and date followed by Time zone. Enabling day light saving time moves the clock forward one hour, and disabling it moves the clock back one hour.

The Clock Battery

  • The camera's clock is powered by a built-in backup battery.
    The backup battery charges when the main battery is inserted into the camera or when the camera is connected to an optional AC adapter, and it can run the clock for several days after about 10 hours of charging.
  • If the camera's backup battery becomes exhausted, the date and time setting screen is displayed when the camera is turned on. Set the date and time again. See step 2 of "Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time" (28) for more information.

Imprinting the Shooting Date on Printed Images

  • You can permanently imprint the shooting date on images as they are captured by setting Print date in the setup menu.
  • If you want the shooting date to be printed without using the Print date setting, print using the ViewNX 2 software (104).

Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode

Rotate the mode dial to select a shooting mode.

• (auto) mode is used in this example. Rotate the mode dial to 📷.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode - 1

text_image Diagram of a DSLR camera with an inset showing the dial and control buttons for camera settings.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode - 2

Notes About the Flash

In situations where a flash is needed, such as in dark locations or when the subject is backlit, make sure to raise the flash (☐59).

Available Shooting Modes

Auto mode

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Auto mode - 1

Used for general shooting.

SCENE Scene mode

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - SCENE Scene mode - 1

Camera settings are optimized according to the scene that you select. When using scene auto selector, the camera automatically selects the optimum scene mode when you frame an image, making it even easier to take images using settings that suit the scene.

EFFECTS Special effects

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - EFFECTS Special effects - 1

Effects can be applied to images during shooting.

P, S, A, M mode

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - P, S, A, M mode - 1

Select these modes for greater control over shutter speed and aperture value.

U1, U2, U3 User settings mode

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - U1, U2, U3 User settings mode - 1

Setting combinations that are frequently used for shooting can be saved. The saved settings can be immediately retrieved for shooting simply by rotating the mode dial to U1, U2 or U3.

Movie mode

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Movie mode - 1

You can record slow motion and fast motion movies, in addition to basic movies.

CSM Movie custom setting mode

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - CSM Movie custom setting mode - 1

You can use aperture-priority auto or manual mode, or change the settings for image recording.

Step 3 Frame a Picture

1 Hold the camera steady.

  • Keep fingers and other objects away from the lens, flash, AF-assist illuminator, microphone, and speaker.
  • When taking pictures in portrait ("tall") orientation, turn the camera so that the flash is above the lens.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Hold the camera steady. - 1

natural_image Line drawing of hands holding a Nikon DSLR camera (no text or symbols on the device body)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Hold the camera steady. - 2

natural_image Illustration of hands holding a Nikon digital camera (no text or symbols visible)

2 Frame the picture.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Frame the picture. - 1

natural_image Illustration of a woman with a sailboat on water, no text or symbols present

Viewfinder

By pressing the □ button, you can shoot while looking through the viewfinder (□10).

When Using a Tripod

• We recommend using a tripod to stabilize the camera in the following situations.

  • When shooting in dim lighting with the flash lowered, or in a shooting mode in which the flash is disabled
  • When using the telephoto setting

- When using a tripod to stabilize the camera during shooting, set Vibration reduction to Off in the setup menu (99) to prevent potential errors caused by this function.

Using the Zoom

When you move the zoom control, the zoom lens position changes.

• To zoom in closer to the subject: Move toward T (telephoto)
- To zoom out and view a larger area: Move toward W (wide-angle)

Zoom out Zoom in
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using the Zoom - 1

text_image W T W T ON/OFF Optical zoom Digital zoom

- A zoom indicator is displayed at the top of the monitor when the zoom control is moved.

- Digital zoom, which allows you to further magnify the subject up to approximately 4× the maximum optical zoom ratio, can be activated by moving and holding the zoom control toward T when the camera is zoomed in to the maximum optical zoom position.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using the Zoom - 2

Digital Zoom and Interpolation

While using digital zoom, the image quality decreases due to interpolation when the zoom is increased beyond the ▲ position.

The position of □ moves to the right as the size of an image decreases.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Digital Zoom and Interpolation - 1

text_image W T

Small image size

Step 4 Focus and Shoot

1 Press the shutter-release button halfway.

  • When the subject is in focus, the focus area that includes the subject or focus indicator (14) glows green (multiple focus areas can glow green).
  • When you are using digital zoom, the camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame and the focus area is not displayed. When the camera has focused, the focus indicator glows green.
  • If the focus area or focus indicator flashes red, the camera is unable to focus. Modify the composition and try pressing the shutter-release button halfway again.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button halfway. - 1

natural_image Diagram of a DSLR camera with a hand pressing a button (no text or symbols present)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button halfway. - 2

natural_image Illustration of a woman by a lakeside with a sailboat and mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

2 Without lifting your finger, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Without lifting your finger, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. - 1

The Shutter-release Button

Press halfwayNIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Shutter-release Button - 1To set focus and exposure (shutter speed and aperture value), press the shutter-release button lightly until you feel a slight resistance. Focus and exposure remain locked while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Press all the wayNIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Shutter-release Button - 2Press the shutter-release button all the way to release the shutter and take an image.Do not use force when pressing the shutter-release button, as this may result in camera shake and blurred images. Press the button gently.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Shutter-release Button - 3

Notes About Saving Images and Recording Movies

The indicator showing the number of exposures remaining or the indicator showing the maximum movie length flashes while images are being saved or while a movie is being recorded. Do not open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover or remove the battery or memory card while an indicator is flashing. Doing this could result in loss of data, or in damage to the camera or the memory card.

Step 5 Play Back Images

1 Press the ▶ ( playback) button.

- If you press and hold down the ▶ ( playback) button while the camera is turned off, the camera turns on in playback mode.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the ▶ ( playback) button. - 1

text_image Multi selector ► (playback) button

2 Use the multi selector to select an image to display.

  • Press and hold down ▲▼◀▶ to scroll through the images quickly.
    • Images can also be selected by rotating the multi selector or command dial.
  • To return to shooting mode, press the ▶ button or shutter-release button.

Display the previous image
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector to select an image to display. - 1

natural_image Circular diagram with directional arrows and central 'OK' label, no readable text or symbols beyond the label

Display the next image

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector to select an image to display. - 2

text_image 15/11/2013 15:30 0064.JPG NEP 4/132

Switching the Information in the Monitor

Press the Fn2 button to switch between showing and hiding the photo information or shooting information that is displayed in the monitor (11).

Step 6 Delete an Image

1 Press the 📋 button to delete the image currently displayed in the monitor.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Step 6 Delete an Image - 1

natural_image Diagram of a DSLR camera with a circular icon labeled 'Waste' pointing to its screen (no text or symbols on the device itself)

2 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Yes and press the ⓄK button.

• The deleted image cannot be recovered.
- To cancel, select No and press the Ⓞ button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Step 6 Delete an Image - 2

text_image Erase 1 image? Yes No

Notes About RAW and JPEG Images Recorded at the Same Time

When images taken with an Image quality (72) setting of RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal are deleted with the 📋 button, both the RAW (NRW) and JPEG images that were recorded at the same time are deleted.

To delete only RAW (NRW) images or JPEG images, select Erase selected NRW images or Erase selected JPEG images in Delete of the playback menu (88).

Deleting Images in a Sequence

- If you press the 📋 button and delete a key picture while only key pictures are displayed for sequences of images (89), all images in the sequence, including the key picture, are deleted.

- To delete individual images in a sequence, press the OK button to display them one at a time and press the 📋 button.

Deleting the Last Image Captured While in Shooting Mode

When using shooting mode, press the ⏻ button to delete the last image that was saved.

Deleting Multiple Images

To delete multiple images, select Delete from the playback menu (☐88).

Shooting Features

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shooting Features - 1

(Auto) Mode

Used for general shooting.

The camera selects the focus area for autofocus in accordance with the composition or subject.

- The camera automatically selects one or more of the 9 focus areas containing the subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus areas that are in focus glow green.

• See "Focusing" (☐ 82) for more information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - (Auto) Mode - 1

text_image U U2 U3 W W MISO ON/ OFF

Functions Available in (Auto) Mode

  • Flash mode (59)
  • Self-timer (62)
  • Focus mode (64)
  • Exposure compensation (69)
  • Quick menu (70)

Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)

When a scene is selected, camera settings are automatically optimized for the selected scene.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Scene"] --> B["MENU"]
    B --> C["Scene menu"]
    C --> D["Scene auto selector"]
    C --> E["Portrait"]
    C --> F["Landscape"]
    C --> G["Sports"]
    C --> H["Night portrait"]
    C --> I["Party/indoor"]
    C --> J["Beach"]

Press the MENU button to display the scene menu and select a scene using the multi selector.

Scene auto selector (default setting) (40)Night landscape (41)2
PortraitClose-up (41)
Landscape2Food (42)
Sports (40)1Museum (42)1
Night portrait (40)3Fireworks show (42)2,3
Party/indoor (41)1Black and white copy (42)1
Beach1Backlighting (43)1
Snow1Panorama (44)
Sunset2,3Pet portrait (45)
Dusk/dawn2,3

1 The camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame.

^2 The camera focuses at infinity.

3 Use of a tripod is recommended, because the shutter speed is slow. Set Vibration reduction to Off in the setup menu (99) when using a tripod to stabilize the camera during shooting.

To View a Description (Help Display) of Each Scene

Select a scene and move the zoom control (☐1) toward T (?) to view a description of that scene. To return to the original screen, move the zoom control toward T (?) again.

Tips and Notes

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Tips and Notes - 1

Scene auto selector

- When you point the camera at the subject, the camera automatically selects the optimum scene mode from the list below and adjusts the shooting settings accordingly.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 1 Portrait (close-up image of one to two persons)
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 2Portrait (shooting an image of three or more persons or shooting a composition with a large background area)
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 3 Landscape
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 4 Night portrait (close-up image of one to two persons)
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 5Night portrait (shooting an image of three or more persons or shooting a composition with a large background area)
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 6Night landscapeThe camera shoots images continuously and combines and saves them as one image in the same way as when Hand-held in (night landscape) (41) is selected.
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 7 Close-up
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 8 Backlighting (shooting non-human subjects)
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 9 Backlighting (shooting human subjects)
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 10 Other shooting scenes

- Depending upon shooting conditions, the camera may not select the desired scene mode. Should this occur, switch to 📄 (auto) mode (30) or select the optimum scene mode for the subject manually.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Scene auto selector - 11

Sports

  • While the shutter-release button is held all the way down, the camera shoots up to about 6 images continuously at a rate of about 8 fps (when image quality is set to Normal and image size is set to 12M 4000×3000).
  • The frame rate for continuous shooting may become slow depending upon the current image quality setting, image size setting, the memory card used, or shooting condition.
  • Focus, exposure, and hue are fixed at the values determined with the first image in each series.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Sports - 1

Night portrait

• The flash always fires. Raise the flash before shooting.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Night portrait - 1

Party/indoor

- To avoid the effects of camera shake, hold the camera steady. Set Vibration reduction to Off in the setup menu (99) when using a tripod to stabilize the camera during shooting.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Party/indoor - 1

Night landscape

  • From the screen displayed after 📄 Night landscape is selected, select 📄 Hand-held or 📋 Tripod.
    • Hand-held (default setting):

  • Press the shutter-release button all the way to capture a series of images which are combined into a single image and saved.

  • Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera still until a still image is displayed. After taking an image, do not turn the camera off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.
  • The angle of view (i.e., the area visible in the frame) seen in the saved image is narrower than that seen in the monitor at the time of shooting.

- Tripod:

  • One image is captured at a slow shutter speed when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way.
  • Vibration reduction is disabled even when Vibration reduction (99) in the setup menu is set to On.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Night landscape - 1

Close-up

  • The focus mode (64) setting is changed to 📋 (close range only) and the camera automatically zooms to the closest position at which it can focus.
  • You can move the focus area. Press the OK button, use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ or rotate it to move the focus area, and press the OK button to apply the setting.

Food

  • The focus mode (64) setting is changed to (macro close-up) and the camera automatically zooms to the closest position at which it can focus.
  • You can adjust hue by using the multi selector ▲▼. The hue setting is saved in the camera's memory even after the camera is turned off.
  • You can move the focus area. Press the OK button, use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ or rotate

it to move the focus area, and press the Ⓞ button to apply the setting.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Food - 1

text_image QUAL 1/250 F5.6 [1250] NORI 24

Museum

  • The camera captures a series of up to 10 images while the shutter-release button is held all the way down, and the sharpest image in the series is automatically selected and saved (BSS (Best Shot Selector)).
    • The flash does not fire.

Fireworks show

• The shutter speed is fixed at about 4 seconds.
- The zoom position moved one step toward the wide-angle position from the maximum optical zoom position cannot be used.

Black and white copy

- Use together with ⚙ (macro close-up) focus mode (☐64) when shooting subjects that are close to the camera.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Black and white copy - 1

Backlighting

  • From the screen displayed after 📋 Backlighting is selected, HDR (high dynamic range) composition can be set.
  • Off (default setting): The flash fires to prevent the subject from being hidden in shadow. Shoot images with the flash raised.
  • Level 1 -Level 3: Use when taking images with very bright and dark areas in the same frame. Select Level 1 when there is less difference between bright and dark areas, and Level 3 when there is more difference between bright and dark areas.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Backlighting - 1

Notes About HDR

  • Use of a tripod is recommended. Set Vibration reduction in the setup menu (☐99) to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.
  • The angle of view (i.e., the area visible in the frame) seen in the saved image is narrower than that seen in the monitor at the time of shooting.
  • When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, the camera shoots images continuously and saves the following two images.

  • A non-HDR composite image

  • An HDR composite image in which the loss of details in highlights or shadows is minimized

- If there is only enough memory to save one image, an image processed by D-Lighting (88) at the time of shooting, in which dark areas of the image are corrected, is the only image saved.

- Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera still until a still image is displayed. After taking an image, do not turn the camera off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.

- Depending on the shooting conditions, dark shadows may appear around bright subjects and bright areas may appear around dark subjects. You can compensate by lowering the level setting.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About HDR - 1

Panorama

- From the screen displayed after ☐ Panorama is selected, select ☑ Easy panorama or ☒ Panorama assist.

- Easy panorama (default setting): You can take a panorama image simply moving the camera in the desired direction.

  • Shooting range can be selected from Normal (180°) (default setting) or Wide (360°).
  • The zoom position is fixed at wide-angle.
  • Press the shutter-release button all the way down, remove your finger from the button, and then slowly pan the camera horizontally. Shooting ends when the camera captures the specified shooting range.
  • Focus and exposure are locked when shooting starts.
  • If you press the OK button when a captured image is displayed in full-frame playback mode, the image scrolls automatically. The images cannot be edited on this camera.

See "Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playback)" (💡2) for more information.

- Panorama assist: Use this mode when shooting a series of images that can later be joined on a computer to form a single panorama.

  • Use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ to select the direction in which images are to be joined and press the OK button.
  • After shooting the first image, shoot the necessary number of images while confirming the seams. To finish shooting, press the OK button.
  • Transfer taken images to a computer and use the Panorama Maker software (105) to join them in a single panorama.

See "Using Panorama Assist" (5) for more information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Panorama - 1

Notes About Printing Panorama Images

The entire image may not be able to be printed depending on the printer's settings. Additionally, printing may not be possible depending on the printer.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Printing Panorama Images - 1

Pet portrait

  • When you point the camera at a dog or cat, the camera detects the pet's face and focuses on it. By default, the shutter is automatically released when focus is acquired (pet portrait auto release).
  • From the screen displayed after 🎨 Pet portrait is selected, select Single or Continuous.

- Single: Whenever the detected face is in focus, the camera captures 1 image.

- Continuous: Whenever the detected face is in focus, the camera captures 3 images continuously.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Pet portrait - 1

Pet Portrait Auto Release

- Press the multi selector ◀ (💡) to change the Pet portrait auto release settings.

  • 📄: The camera detects a dog or cat face and automatically releases the shutter when the detected face is in focus.
  • OFF: The camera does not release the shutter automatically, even if a dog or cat face is detected. Press the shutter-release button. The camera also detects human faces when OFF is selected.

  • Pet portrait auto release is set to OFF after 5 bursts have been taken.

  • Shooting is also possible by pressing the shutter-release button, regardless of the Pet portrait auto release setting. When Continuous is selected, you can take images continuously while holding down the shutter-release button all the way.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Pet Portrait Auto Release - 1

Focus Area

  • When the camera detects a face, the face is displayed inside a yellow border. When the camera acquires focus on a face displayed inside a double border (focus area), the double border turns green. If no faces are detected, the camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.
  • In some shooting conditions, the pet face may not be detected and other subjects may be displayed inside a border.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Focus Area - 1

text_image QUAL 1/250 F5.6F5.6 12800

Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting)

Effects can be applied to images during shooting.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting) - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Special effects"] --> B["Special effects"]
    B --> C["AF area mode"]
    D["Special effects"] --> E["Creative monochrome"]
    E --> F["Painting"]
    E --> G["Zoom exposure"]
    E --> H["Defocus during exposure"]
    E --> I["Cross process"]
    E --> J["Soft"]
    E --> K["SEPTA"]
    D --> L["OK"]
    L --> M["Menu"]

Press the MENU button to display the special effects menu and select an effect using the multi selector.

Creative monochrome (default setting)Creates monochrome photographs by adjusting the grainy feel and contrast. Monochrome photographs with the dark and light tones reversed can also be created (solarization).Rotate the main command dial to adjust grainy feel.Rotate the sub-command dial to adjust contrast.
Painting Gives the image a painting-like appearance.
Zoom exposure*Creates dynamic images converging toward the center of the frame by moving the zoom position from the wide-angle to telephoto zoom position until the shutter closes.The zooming magnification can be set to 2× or 3× (default setting) by rotating the main command dial.The zoom is fixed at the wide-angle end before shooting.AF area mode (58, 73) is fixed at Center (normal).The shutter speed is fixed at 2 seconds, and the effect can be produced only when the shooting mode icon on the shooting screen is green.When a shutter speed that is slow enough for zoom exposure cannot be obtained due to too bright a subject, etc., the shooting mode icon does not turn green, and the effect will not be produced.
Defocus during exposure*Creates images with a soft blur by varying focus slightly until the shutter closes.The effect can be produced only when the shooting mode icon on the shooting screen is green.When a shutter speed that is slow enough for defocus during exposure cannot be obtained due to too bright a subject, etc., the shooting mode icon does not turn green, and the effect will not be produced.The desired effect may not be produced depending on shooting conditions such as the distance to the subject.
Cross processCreates images with an unusual hue by converting a positive color image into negative or negative color image into positive.Rotate the main command dial to select hue.
SoftSoftens the image by adding a slight blur to the entire image.
Nostalgic sepiaAdds a sepia tone and reduces the contrast to simulate the qualities of an old photograph.
High key Gives the entire image a bright tone.
Low key Gives the entire image a dark tone.
Selective colorCreates a black and white image in which only the specified color remains.Rotate the main command dial to select the color to be retained from the slider.Press the OK button to hide the slider and cancel color selection. To display the slider again, press the OK button again. NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting) - 2

* Use of a tripod is recommended during Zoom exposure or Defocus during exposure. Vibration reduction will not function even if Vibration reduction in the setup menu is set to On.

  • The focus area for autofocus differs depending on the setting of AF area mode (58, 73).
  • When AF area mode is set to Auto (default setting), the camera automatically selects one or more of the 9 focus areas containing the subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus areas that are in focus glow green.

Functions Available in Special Effects Mode

  • AF area mode (58, 73)
  • Flash mode (59)
  • Self-timer (62)
  • Focus mode (64)
  • Exposure compensation (69)
  • Special effects menu (46)
  • Quick menu (70)

P, S, A, M Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)

Images can be shot with greater control by setting the quick menu (70) or shooting menu (73) items in addition to setting the shutter speed or aperture value manually according to shooting conditions and requirements.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - P, S, A, M Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting) - 1

text_image OFF P SENSE OFF ON/ OFF
  • The focus area for autofocus differs depending on the setting of AF area mode (☐58, 73).
  • When AF area mode is set to Center (normal) (default setting), the camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame.

Rotate the command dial to set the shutter speed and aperture value.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - P, S, A, M Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting) - 2

text_image Diagram of a camera with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating rotation or adjustment mechanism.

Sub-command dial

Main command dial

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - P, S, A, M Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting) - 3

text_image 1/250 F6 F5.6 Ape

Shutter speed

Aperture value

Exposure modeShutter speed (53)Aperture value (50)
PProgrammed auto (51)Automatically adjusted (flexible program is enabled by the main command dial).
SShutter-priority auto (51)Adjusted by the main command dial.Automatically adjusted.
AAperture-priority auto (51)Automatically adjusted.Adjusted by the sub-command dial.
MManual (51)Adjusted by the main command dial.Adjusted by the sub-command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - P, S, A, M Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting) - 4

More Information

See "Customize command dials" (100) for more information.

Exposure

The procedure for shooting images at the desired brightness (exposure) by adjusting the shutter speed or aperture value is called "determine exposure". The sense of dynamism and amount of background defocus in images to be shot vary depending on the combinations of shutter speed and aperture value even if the exposure is the same.

Adjusting the Shutter Speed

In S mode, the range is from a maximum of 1/4000 to 15 seconds. In M mode, the range is from a maximum of 1/4000 to 60 seconds. See "The Control Range of the Shutter Speed" (☐ 53) for more information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Adjusting the Shutter Speed - 1

natural_image Two black-and-white photos showing a fountain with water spray and a vertical arrow indicating transformation (no text or symbols)

Faster 1/1000 s Slower 1/30 s

Adjusting the Aperture Value

In A and M modes, the range is from f/2 to 8 (wide-angle position) and from f/4 to 8 (telephoto zoom position).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Adjusting the Aperture Value - 1

natural_image Black-and-white photo of daisies with a double-headed arrow indicating transformation (no text or symbols)

Smaller aperture (Large f-number) f/8

Larger aperture (Small f-number) f/2
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Adjusting the Aperture Value - 2

Aperture Value (F-number) and Zoom

Large apertures (expressed by small f-numbers) let more light into the camera, and small apertures (large f-numbers) let less light.

The aperture value of the zoom lens of this camera changes depending on the zoom position. When zooming to the wide-angle position and telephoto zoom position, the aperture values are f/2 and f/4, respectively.

- When Fixed aperture (99) is set to On, zooming can be performed with minimum changes in the aperture value.

P (Programmed auto)

Use for automatic control of the exposure by the camera.

- Different combinations of shutter speed and aperture value can be selected without changing the exposure by rotating the main command dial ("flexible program"). While flexible program is in effect, a flexible program

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - P (Programmed auto) - 1

text_image P QUAL 1/125F5.F5.6 12801

mark (✗) is displayed next to the mode indicator (P) in the upper left of the monitor.

- To cancel flexible program, rotate the main command dial until the flexible program mark (✗) is no longer displayed, or press the AE-L/AF-L button while pressing the Fn1 button. Selecting another shooting mode, or turning off the camera, also cancels flexible program.

S (Shutter-priority auto)

Use to shoot fast moving subjects at a fast shutter speed, or use to emphasize the movements of a moving subject at a slow shutter speed.

- The shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating the main command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - S (Shutter-priority auto) - 1

text_image S QUAL 1/125 F5.6 F5.6 12801

A (Aperture-priority auto)

Use to bring subjects including both the foreground and background into focus or blur the subject's background intentionally.

- The aperture value can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - A (Aperture-priority auto) - 1

text_image A 1/250 F5.6 5.6 12801

M (Manual)

Use to control the exposure according to shooting requirements.

- When adjusting the aperture value or shutter speed, the degree of deviation from the exposure value measured by the camera is displayed in the exposure indicator of the monitor. The degree of deviation in the exposure indicator is displayed in EVs (-3 to +3 EV in increments of 1/3 EV).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - M (Manual) - 1

text_image M 1/125F5.6F5.6 [1280]

Exposure indicator

- The shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating the main command dial and the aperture value can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - M (Manual) - 2

Notes About Shooting

  • When zooming is performed after the exposure is set, exposure combinations or aperture value may be changed.
  • When the subject is too dark or too bright, it may not be possible to obtain the appropriate exposure. In such cases, the shutter speed indicator or aperture value indicator flashes when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (except when the M mode is used). Change the shutter speed setting or aperture value.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Shooting - 1

Notes About ISO Sensitivity

When ISO sensitivity (☐72) is set to Auto (default setting), ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800, the ISO sensitivity in M mode is fixed at ISO 80.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About ISO Sensitivity - 1

Built-in ND Filter

When the subject is too bright, set Built-in ND filter in the shooting menu (73) to reduce the light and shoot.

Functions Available in P, S, A, M Modes

  • AF area mode (58, 73)
  • Flash mode (59)
  • Self-timer (62)
  • Focus mode (64)
  • Exposure compensation (69)
  • Quick menu (70)
  • Shooting menu (73)
  • Setup menu (99)

The Control Range of the Shutter Speed

The control range of the shutter speed differs depending on the aperture value or the ISO sensitivity setting. Additionally, the control range changes in the following continuous shooting settings.

P, S, A, M Modes

SettingControl range
P, S, A modeM mode
ISO sensitivity (☐72)1Auto2, ISO 80-2002, ISO 80-4002, ISO 80-8002 1/4000^3 - 1 s 1/4000^3 - 60 s
ISO 80, 100 1/4000 ^3 - 15 s
ISO 125 1/4000 ^3 - 13 s
ISO 160 1/4000 ^3 - 10 s
ISO 200 1/4000 ^3 - 8 s
ISO 250 1/4000 ^3 - 6 s
ISO 320 1/4000 ^3 - 5 s
ISO 400 1/4000 ^3 - 4 s
ISO 500 1/4000 ^3 - 3 s 1/4000^3 - 30 s ISO 640 1/4000
^3 - 2.5 s
ISO 800 1/4000 ^3 - 2 s
ISO 1000 1/4000 ^3 - 1.6 s 1/4000^3 - 15 s ISO 1250 1/4000
^3 - 1.3 s
ISO 1600 1/4000 ^3 - 1 s
ISO 2000 1/4000 ^3 - 1/1.3 s 1/4000^3 - 8 s ISO 2500 1/4000
^3 - 1/1.6 s
ISO 3200 1/4000 ^3 - 1/2 s
Hi 1 1/4000 ^3 - 1/4 s 1/4000 ^3 - 2 s
SettingControl range
P, S, A modeM mode
Continuous(73)Continuous H, Continuous M, Continuous L, BSS 1/4000^3 - 1/8 s 1/4000 ^3 - 1/8 s
Multi-shot 16 1/4000 - 1/30 s 1/4000 - 1/30 s
Continuous H: 120 fps1/4000 - 1/125 s 1/4000 - 1/125 s
Continuous H: 60 fps1/4000 - 1/60 s 1/4000 - 1/60 s
Intvl timer shooting 1/4000^3 - 1 s 1/4000 ^3 - 1 s

1 The ISO sensitivity setting is restricted depending on the continuous shooting setting (78).

2 In M mode, the ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.

3 The maximum shutter speed value varies depending on the aperture value. The shutter speed becomes slower when the aperture value is smaller. When the aperture value is set to f/2 (wide-angle position) or f/4 (telephoto zoom position), the shutter speed can be set to maximum 1/2000 second. When the aperture value is set to f/4.5 to f/8 (wide-angle position) or f/7.1 to f/8 (telephoto zoom position), the shutter speed can be set to maximum 1/4000 second.

During Movie Custom Setting Mode

Setting Control range
Shooting mode (96)A Mode 1/8000 - 1/30 s
M Mode 1/4000 - 1/30 s

U1, U2 and U3 (User Settings Modes)

Setting combinations that are frequently used for shooting (User settings) can be saved in U1, U2 and U3. Shooting is possible in P (Programmed auto), S (Shutter-priority auto), A (Aperture-priority auto) or M (Manual).

Rotate the mode dial to U1, U2 or U3 to retrieve the settings saved in Save user settings.

• Frame the subject and shoot with these settings, or change the settings as required.
- The setting combinations that are retrieved when the mode dial is rotated to U1, U2 or U3 can be changed as many times as you want in Save user settings.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - U1, U2 and U3 (User Settings Modes) - 1

text_image U1 OFFDCS W ON/OFF

Saving Settings in U1, U2 or U3 Mode (Save User Settings)

The frequently used settings for shooting can be changed and saved in U1, U2 and U3.

1 Rotate the mode dial to U1, U2 or U3.
2 Change to a frequently used combination of shooting settings.

- Set the flash mode (☐59) or focus mode (☐64).

- Display the quick menu by pressing the 🔒 button (70).

- Press the MENU button to display the menu and switch between tabs with the multi selector (☐13).

  • U1, U2, U3 tabs: Display the specialized menus for U1, U2 and U3 (75).
  • P, S, A, M tabs: Display the shooting menus (73).

3 After changing the settings, use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Save user settings in the specialized menu for U1, U2 or U3, and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Saving Settings in U1, U2 or U3 Mode (Save User Settings) - 1

text_image User settings Save user settings -- Reset user settings -- Shooting mode Focal length (35mm equiv.) Photo info Virtual horizon display Initial monitor display

4 Select Yes and press the ⓄK button.

• The current settings are saved.
- Move the zoom control toward T(Q) to display the settings. Move toward T(Q) again to return to the Save user settings screen.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select Yes and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image Save user settings Save current settings? Yes No Info

The Clock Battery

If the internal clock battery (☐29) is exhausted, the settings saved in U1, U2 or U3 will be reset. Writing down any important setting is recommended.

Confirmation Screen of User Settings

Move the zoom control toward T (Q) in step 4 of Save user settings to display the settings on the screen.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Confirmation Screen of User Settings - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 M 1/250F5.6 +2.0 7 AF: AF-S ON ON 8 ON OFF 9 NR 10 28 35 50 85 105 135 200 mm 11 AF 28 mm NOKN 12 AUTO AUTO OFF 1415161718

1 Shooting mode
2 Shutter speed (S or M mode)
3 Aperture value (A or M mode)
4 Flash mode
5 Flash exp. comp.
6 Flash control
7 AF area mode, Autofocus mode, AF assist
8 Metering, continuous shooting mode, Active D-Lighting
9 Noise reduction filter

10 Zoom memory
11 Focus mode, Focal length (35mm equiv.), Distortion control
12 Photo info, Virtual horizon display
13 Initial monitor display
14 Image quality, Image size
15 ISO sensitivity
16 White balance
17 Auto bracketing
18 Picture Control

Functions Available in U1, U2 and U3 Modes

  • Flash mode (59)
  • Self-timer (62)
  • Focus mode (64)
  • Exposure compensation (69)
  • Quick menu (70)
  • Shooting menu (73)
    • Specialized menu for U1, U2 or U3 (75)
  • Setup menu (99)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions Available in U1, U2 and U3 Modes - 1

Resetting for U1, U2 and U3

If Reset user settings is selected in specialized menu for U1, U2 or U3, the settings that are saved in the user settings are reset as follows:

  • Specialized menus for U1, U2 and U3 (75): Shooting mode: P Programmed auto, Focal length (35mm equiv.): 28 mm, Photo info: information hidden, Virtual horizon display: Circle, Initial monitor display: Show info, Flash mode: AUTO Auto, Focus: AF Autofocus, Self-timer: Off, AF assist: Auto

- Shooting menu, quick menu: Same as the default setting for each item.

Functions That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector

The functions that are available vary with the shooting mode, as shown below.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector - 1

text_image 1 | 5 2 — ⏻ — 4 OK | 3
Function SCENEEFFECTSP, S, A, M,U1, U2, U3CSM
1Flash mode (59)3√-
2Self-timer (62)
Smile timer (63)--
Remote control1
3Focus mode (64)
4 [+] AF area mode 2--3√-

1 Set this function to release the shutter with the Remote Control ML-L3 (available separately) (○106).
2 Set the method of how the camera selects the focus area for autofocus (73). Set Multi selector right press to Off in the setup menu (99) if you do not want to display the AF area mode setting when the multi sector is pressed.
3 Availability depends on the setting. See "Default Settings" (67) for more information.

Using the Flash

You can shoot images with a flash by raising the built-in flash. You can set the flash mode to match the shooting conditions.

1 Lower the ⬆ (flash pop-up) control to raise the flash.

- When the flash is lowered, flash operation is disabled and Ⓞ is displayed.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Lower the ⬆ (flash pop-up) control to raise the flash. - 1

text_image ① Nikon

2 Press the multi selector ▲ (⚡).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the multi selector ▲ (⚡). - 1

text_image OK [+]

3 Select the desired flash mode (60) and press the OK button.

  • When the manual flash is selected, select the flash output and press the OK button.
  • If a setting is not applied by pressing the Ⓞ button within a few seconds, the selection will be canceled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the desired flash mode (60) and press the OK button. - 1

text_image Auto $AUTO $AUTO

Flash Status Display

The status of the flash can be confirmed with the flash mode icon at the top of the monitor by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.

- On: The flash fires in accordance with the flash mode when you press the shutter-release button all the way down. When AUTO (auto) is set, the flash fires when Israel displayed.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Flash Status Display - 1

text_image Screenshot of a software toolbar with icons and a button, likely from an older application or design tool interface.
  • Flashing: The flash is charging. The camera cannot shoot images.
  • Off: The flash does not fire when an image is taken.

Available Flash Modes

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Available Flash Modes - 1

Auto

The flash fires when necessary, such as in dim lighting.

- The flash mode icon on the shooting screen is displayed only immediately after the setting is made.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Auto - 1

Auto with red-eye reduction

Reduce red-eye in portraits caused by the flash (61).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Auto with red-eye reduction - 1

Off

The flash does not fire.

• Available when an external flash unit (optional) is attached.

- We recommend using a tripod to stabilize the camera when shooting in dark surroundings.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Off - 1

Fill flash

The flash fires whenever an image is taken. Use to "fill-in" (illuminate) shadows and backlit subjects.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Fill flash - 1

Manual

Fill flash fires at the flash output set for the built-in flash or an optional flash unit whose flash output can be set on the camera.

- Select the flash output from M\FULL (full flash), M\1/2, M\1/4, M\1/8, M\1/16, M\1/32, M\1/64 and M\1/128 (only when an optional flash unit is used). For example, when M\$1/16 is selected, the flash output is 1/16 of the full flash.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Manual - 1

Slow sync

Suited to evening and night portraits that include background scenery. Fill flash fires to illuminate the main subject; slow shutter speeds are used to capture background at night or under dim lighting.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Slow sync - 1

Rear-curtain sync

Fill flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light behind moving subjects.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Rear-curtain sync - 1

Commander mode

The camera's built-in flash emits low-level flashes and an off-camera optional flash unit is controlled wirelessly as a remote flash (60). The Speedlight fires according to the Commander mode options set in the shooting menu (73).

- Not available when an optional flash unit is attached.

- Can be used when P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 mode is selected.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Commander mode - 1

High Temperature Caution

If you are taking images repeatedly with the flash within a short period of time, the flash unit and its surrounding area can become hot. Before lowering the flash, make sure to allow the flash unit and its surrounding area to cool down.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - High Temperature Caution - 1

Lowering the Flash

When not using the flash, gently push to lower the flash until it clicks shut.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Lowering the Flash - 1

text_image Nikon

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Lowering the Flash - 2

The Flash Mode Setting

- The setting may not be available with some shooting modes.

- The setting applied in the following situations is saved in the camera's memory even after the camera is turned off.

- When shooting mode P, S, A or M is used

- When ⏻ (auto with red-eye reduction) is selected in ⏻ (auto) mode

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Flash Mode Setting - 1

Red-eye Reduction

If the camera detects red-eye while saving an image, the affected area is processed to reduce red-eye before the image is saved.

Note the following when shooting:

  • More time than usual is required to save images.
  • Red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results in all situations.

- In some cases, red-eye reduction may be applied to areas of an image unnecessarily. In these cases, select another flash mode and take the image again.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Red-eye Reduction - 1

External Flash Unit

When an optional Speedlight or wireless Speedlight commander is attached to the accessory shoe (☐1), the built-in flash is set to off. While the 🔒 icon (Speedlight indicator) is lit on the shooting screen, the Speedlight flash mode is displayed in the monitor.

See "Speedlights (External Flash Unit)" (108) for more information.

Using the Self-timer

The camera is equipped with a self-timer that releases the shutter about 10 seconds, 2 seconds or 1 second after you press the shutter-release button. Set Vibration reduction to Off in the setup menu (☐99) when using a tripod to stabilize the camera during shooting.

1 Press the multi selector ◀ (💡).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the multi selector ◀ (💡). - 1

text_image OK [+]

2 Select ⏻10s (or ⏻2s, ⏻1s), and press the Ⓞ button.

  • To change the time for self-timer, press before pressing the OK button.
    • 10s (10 seconds): Use on important occasions, such as weddings.
  • 2s (2 seconds), 1s (1 second): Use to prevent camera shake.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select ⏻10s (or ⏻2s, ⏻1s), and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image 10s OFF 10s 2s 1s Self-timer

- If a setting is not applied by pressing the OK button within a few seconds, the selection will be canceled.

- When the shooting mode is Pet portrait scene mode, 📋 (pet portrait auto release) is displayed (45). The self-timer cannot be used.

3 Frame the picture and press the shutter-release button halfway.

• Focus and exposure are set.

4 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.

  • Countdown starts. The self-timer lamp flashes and then glows steadily about one second before the shutter is released (except when ⚙1s is set).
  • When the shutter is released, the self-timer is set to OFF.
    • To stop the countdown, press the shutter-release button again.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. - 1

text_image Diagram showing a camera control panel with a hand pressing a button and a close-up of the main frame highlighting a sunburst effect.

Shooting Smiling Faces Automatically (Smile Timer)

When the camera detects a smiling face, you can take an image automatically without pressing the shutter-release button.

- This function can be used when the shooting mode is (auto), P, S, A, M, U1, U2, U3, scene mode Portrait or Night portrait.

1 Press the multi selector ◀ (💡).

- Change any flash mode, exposure, or shooting menu settings before pressing ◀.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the multi selector ◀ (💡). - 1

text_image OK [S+]

2 Select 📋 (Smile timer), and press the Ⓞ button.

- If a setting is not applied by pressing the Ⓞ button within a few seconds, the selection will be canceled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select 📋 (Smile timer), and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image 10s OFF Smile timer

3 Frame the picture and wait for the subject to smile without pressing the shutter-release button.

  • Point the camera at a human face.
  • If the camera detects that the face framed by the double border is smiling, the shutter is automatically released.
  • Whenever the camera detects a smiling face, it automatically releases the shutter.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Frame the picture and wait for the subject to smile without pressing the shutter-release button. - 1

text_image 1/250F5.6$6 (1280)

4 End automatic shooting.

- To end automatic shooting with smile timer, return to step 1 and select OFF.

Notes About Smile Timer

Under some shooting conditions, the camera may be unable to detect faces or detect smiles (☐83). The shutter-release button can also be used for shooting.

When the Self-timer Lamp Flashes

When using smile timer, the self-timer lamp flashes when the camera detects a face and flashes quickly immediately after the shutter is released.

Using Focus Mode

Set the focus mode according to the distance to the subject.

1 Press the multi selector ▼ ( Aircraft).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using Focus Mode - 1

text_image OK +

2 Select the desired focus mode and press the ⓄK button.

- If a setting is not applied by pressing the Ⓞ button within a few seconds, the selection will be canceled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the desired focus mode and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image AF MF Autofocus

Available Focus Modes

AF Autofocus

The camera automatically adjusts the focus according to the distance to the subject. Use when the distance from the subject to the lens is 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.) or more, or 80 cm (2 ft 8 in.) or more at the maximum telephoto zoom position.

- The focus mode icon on the shooting screen is displayed only immediately after the setting is made.

Close range only/ Macro close-up

Set when taking close-up images.

When the zoom ratio is set to a position where 🎨/💡 and the zoom indicator glow green, the camera can focus on subjects as close as approximately 10 cm (4 in.) from the lens. When the zoom is at the position where 🔒 is displayed, the camera can focus on subjects as close as approximately 2 cm (0.8 in.) from the lens.

- When using the maximum telephoto zoom position, the camera can focus on subjects as close as approximately 45 cm (1 ft 6 in.) from the lens.

- When using 📋 (close range only), the camera focuses on subjects in close range. The camera may not be able to focus on subjects at far distances.

Infinity

Use when shooting distant scenes through window glass or when shooting landscapes.

The camera automatically adjusts the focus near infinity.

- The camera may not be able to focus on nearby objects.

- The flash mode is set to ⏻ (off).

MF Manual focus

The focus can be adjusted on any subject at a distance from approximately 2 cm (0.8 in.) to infinity from the lens (66). The closest distance at which the camera can focus varies depending on the zoom position.

Notes About Shooting with the Flash

The flash may be unable to light the entire subject at distances of less than 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.).

Focus Mode Setting

  • The setting may not be available with some shooting modes.
  • For shooting modes P, S, A and M, the setting is saved in the camera's memory even after the camera is turned off.

Taking Images with Manual Focus

Available when the shooting mode is P, S, A, M, U1, U2, U3, special effects mode, Sports scene mode, movie mode or movie custom setting mode.

1 Press the multi selector ▼ ( Aircraft), select MF (manual focus), and then press the Ⓞ button.

- An enlarged view of the center area of the frame is displayed.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Taking Images with Manual Focus - 1

text_image OK OK

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Taking Images with Manual Focus - 2

text_image AF AF MF Manual focus

2 Use the multi selector to adjust the focus while checking the enlarged view.

  • Press ▲ to move the focus farther away and press ▼ to move it closer.
  • The focus can be adjusted in higher detail by rotating the multi selector than pressing ▲▼.
  • When ▶ is pressed, first the camera focuses with autofocus, and then the manual focus can be operated. When a confirmation dialog is displayed, select Yes and press the OK button so that the camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame with autofocus.
  • Press the shutter-release button halfway to check the composition. Press the shutter-release button all the way to take the image.

3 Press the ⓄK button.

• The set focus is locked.
- Press the shutter-release button all the way to take the image.
- To readjust the focus, press the Ⓞ button to display the screen in step 2.

MF (Manual Focus)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Taking Images with Manual Focus - 3

text_image M F 1/250 1/250 6.6 F5 250 T

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Taking Images with Manual Focus - 4

text_image M QUAL 1/250 F5.6 [1280]
  • The digits displayed for the gauge on the right of the monitor in step 2 serve as a guideline for the distance to a subject that is in focus when the gauge indicates the center. To change the unit of this gauge, use MF distance indicator units in the setup menu (99).
  • The actual range at which the subject can be in focus varies depending on the aperture value and zoom position. To see whether the subject is in focus, check the image after shooting.

Default Settings

The default settings for each shooting mode are described below.

Shooting modeFlash mode(59)Self-timer(62)Focus mode(64)AF area mode(73)
(auto) AUTO OFF1 AF^2 -
EFFECTS (special effects)3OFF AF[■]4
P, S, A, MAUTO OFF^1 AF[■]
U1, U2, U3 (User settings)AUTO OFF1AF[■]
[movie),CSM (movie custom setting)5OFF AF-
Scene
scene (scene auto selector) AUTO^6 OFF AF5-
(portrait) OFF1 AF^5 -
(landscape)5OFF▲5-
(sports)5OFF AF7-
(night portrait)8 OFF^1 AF^5 -
(party/indoor)9OFF AF5-
(beach)AUTOOFF AF^10 -
(snow)AUTOOFF AF^10 -
(sunset)5OFF▲5-
(dusk/dawn)5OFF▲5-
(night landscape)5OFF▲5-
(close-up)5OFF5-
(food)5OFF5-
(museum)5OFF AF10-
(fireworks show)5OFF▲5-
(black and white copy)5OFF AF10-
(backlighting)11OFF AF5-
(panorama)12OFF AF10-
(pet portrait)513 AF^10 -

^1 Smile timer can also be selected.

^2 MF (manual focus) cannot be selected.

^3 The default setting is AUTO (auto) when Creative monochrome or Cross process is selected.

The flash is fixed at ⚙ (off) when Zoom exposure or Defocus during exposure is selected.

4 (subject tracking) and [■] (target finding AF) are not available.

The AF area mode is fixed at Center (normal) when Zoom exposure is selected.

^5 The setting cannot be changed.

^6 The camera automatically selects the flash mode appropriate for the scene it has selected. The setting cannot be changed when using the built-in flash.

AF (autofocus) or MF (manual focus) can be selected.

^8 The setting cannot be changed. The flash mode setting is fixed at fill flash with slow sync and red-eye reduction.

9 May switch to slow sync with red-eye reduction flash mode.

^10 AF (autofocus) or ⚪ (macro close-up) can be selected.

When HDR is set to Off, the flash mode is fixed at (fill flash). When HDR is set to other than Off, the flash mode is fixed at (off).

^12 The setting cannot be changed when using Easy panorama.

^15 Pet portrait auto release (☐45) can be set to on or off. Self-timer and remote control cannot be used.

Functions That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial

Adjusting Brightness (Exposure Compensation)

You can adjust overall image brightness.

Select the compensation value by rotating the exposure compensation dial.

• To brighten the image, set a positive (+) value.
- To darken the image, set a negative (−) value.
- When set to a value other than "0", the exposure compensation dial mark turns on when shooting.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the compensation value by rotating the exposure compensation dial. - 1

text_image W U.O T Fn2 ON/OFF +1

Exposure compensation dial mark

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the compensation value by rotating the exposure compensation dial. - 2

Exposure Compensation Value

- If the exposure compensation value is set to a value other than 0.0 when the shooting mode is M (manual) mode, the exposure is not compensated and the standard value of exposure indicator will change.

- When the shooting mode is Fireworks show scene mode (☐42), exposure compensation cannot be used.

- When the exposure compensation is set while using a flash, the compensation is applied to both the background exposure and to the flash output.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Exposure Compensation Value - 1

text_image QUAL Z-1.0 1/250 1/250 F5.6 E1280 J

Exposure compensation value

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Exposure Compensation Value - 2

Exposure Compensation During Movie Recording

  • The range of exposure compensation values that can be set is between -2 and +2 .
  • Once recording starts, the compensation value cannot be changed.
  • If the exposure compensation value is set to a value other than 0.0 when Shooting mode (☐96) of the movie custom setting is Manual, the exposure is not compensated and the standard value of the exposure indicator will not change either.

Functions That Can Be Set Using the 🔒 Button (Quick Menu: When Shooting Still Images)

The functions that can be set vary depending on the shooting mode, as shown below.

FunctionP, S, A, M,U1, U2, U3SCENEEFFECTS
QUALImage quality/Image size
ISOISO sensitivity---
WBWhite balance - √--
BKTAuto bracketing---
MyMy Menu---
Picture Control---

Basic Quick Menu Operations

1 Press the 🔒 button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Basic Quick Menu Operations - 1

text_image Diagram of a DSLR camera with control panel and document icon, showing front view and close-up detail

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Basic Quick Menu Operations - 2

text_image Camera settings interface showing image quality and size options with normal mode set to 1342

2 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to move to the tabs at the top of the screen.

- You can also move to the tabs by rotating the sub-command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Basic Quick Menu Operations - 3

text_image Tabs QUAL NORM AUTO AUTO OFF Image quality Image size Normal FINE NORM FREE NONE NRH 1342

3 Use ◀▶ to select the tab for the function to be set.

- You can also select a tab by rotating the main command dial.

1 QUAL Image quality/Image size * Movie options will be shown when the mode dial is rotated to ▶ or ▶CSM.

2 ISO ISO sensitivity
3 WB White balance
4 BKT Auto bracketing
5 My My Menu
6 Picture Control

4 Use ▲▼ to select an item and change the setting using ◀▶.

- You can also change the setting by rotating the main command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use ▲▼ to select an item and change the setting using ◀▶. - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 ISO sensitivity AUTO Minimum shutter speed OFF Auto AUTO 欧200 磁400 别800 80

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use ▲▼ to select an item and change the setting using ◀▶. - 2

text_image ISO sensitivity Minimum shutter speed Auto

5 Press the Ⓞ button or 🔊 button when setting is complete.

- You can also press the shutter-release button to finish setting.

Available Quick Menu

Option Description
QUALImagequality/Image sizeAllows you to set the image quality (compression ratio) and image size used when saving images.Default setting: Normal (image quality), 4000×3000 (image size)27
ISOISO sensitivityAllows you to control the camera's sensitivity to light.Default setting: AutoWhen Auto is selected, ISO is displayed in the monitor while shooting if ISO sensitivity increases.In M (manual) mode, when set to Auto, ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800, the ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.33
WBWhite balanceAllows you to adjust white balance to suit the weather conditions or light source in order to make the colors in images match what you see with your eyes.Default setting: Auto (normal)35
BKTAuto bracketingContinuous shooting can be performed while changing the exposure (brightness) automatically with the shutter speed (Tv), aperture value (Av) or ISO sensitivity (Sv), or multiple images can be recorded while varying the white balance (WB).Default setting: OFF38
MyMy MenuOnly the menu items that are frequently used for shooting can be displayed.Options that are displayed in My Menu can be changed from Customize My Menu in the setup menu (99).93
PictureControl(COOLPIXPicture Control)Allows you to change the settings for image recording according to the shooting scene or your preferences.Default setting: Standard40

Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Shooting Menu, Specialized Menu for U1, U2 or U3)

Shooting Menu

In the following shooting modes, the settings of the shooting menu can be changed by pressing the MENU button (☐12).

• P, S, A and M modes
• Special effects mode (Only AF area mode can be set.)
• U1,U2 and U3 modes (The settings can be changed in the second tab.)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shooting Menu - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Camera with P/S/A/M modes"] --> B["Menu"]
    B --> C["Shooting menu"]
    C --> D["Custom Picture"]
    C --> E["Metering"]
    C --> F["Continuous"]
    C --> G["AF area mode"]
    C --> H["Autofocus mode"]
    C --> I["Flash exp. c"]
    C --> J["Noise reduc"]
    K["U1, U2, U3 modes"] --> L["Shooting menu"]
    L --> M["Custom Picture"]
    L --> N["Metering"]
    L --> O["Continuous"]
    L --> P["AF area mode"]
    L --> Q["Autofocus mode"]
    L --> R["Flash exp. c"]
    L --> S["Noise reduc"]
Option Description
Custom Picture Control(COOLPIX Custom Picture Control)Allows you to customize the settings of COOLPIX Picture Control (72) and register them in Custom 1 or Custom 2 of Picture Control in the quick menu.
MeteringAllows you to set the method that the camera uses to measure the brightness of the subject.· Default setting: Matrix
ContinuousAllows you to select single or continuous shooting.· Default setting: Single
AF area modeAllows you to change the method of how the camera selects the focus area for autofocus.· Default setting:- P, S, A or M mode: Center (normal)- EFFECTS mode: Auto
Autofocus modeAllows you to select either Single AF, which focuses only when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or Full-time AF, which continues focusing even when the shutter-release button is not pressed halfway.· Default setting: Single AF53
Flash exp. comp.Allows you to adjust the flash output.· Default setting: 0.054
Noise reduction filterAllows you to set the strength of the noise reduction function that is normally performed when saving images.· Default setting: Normal54
Built-in ND filterAllows you to select On or Off for the built-in ND filter.· Default setting: Off55
Distortion controlAllows you to select whether to correct the peripheral distortion that occurs due to the intrinsic characteristics of lenses. Enabling distortion control reduces the size of the frame, as compared to when distortion control is not enabled.· Default setting: Off55
Active D-LightingAllows you to prevent loss of contrast details in highlights and shadows when shooting images.· Default setting: Off56
Zoom memoryWhen the zoom control is moved while pressing the Fn1 button, the zoom position (equivalent to focal length/angle of view in 35mm [135] format) is switched to the positions that have been selected by setting the check box to on in this menu option.· Default setting: On √ for all the check boxes57
Startup zoom positionAllows you to set the zoom position (equivalent to focal length/angle of view in 35mm [135] format) for when the camera is turned on.· Default setting: 28 mm57
M exposure previewWhen On is selected, the exposure setting resulting from the shutter speed and aperture value set in M (manual) mode is reflected in the brightness on the shooting screen.· Default setting: Off58
Focus-coupled meteringIf Metering (73) is set to Matrix or Spot and AF area mode (73) is set to Manual, the brightness of the subject is measured by giving higher priority to the focus area.· Default setting: On58
Commander modeAllows you to set how the wirelessly-controlled optional flash unit fires when the flash mode (59) is set to CMD (commander mode).· Default setting:- Flash mode: Standard flash- Flash control mode: TTL59

Specialized Menu for U1, U2 or U3

In U1, U2 and U3 shooting modes, the settings of the following menu options can be changed in the top tab (☐12).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Specialized Menu for U1, U2 or U3 - 1

text_image U1 EFFECTS U2 U3 W ON/OFF

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Specialized Menu for U1, U2 or U3 - 2

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Specialized Menu for U1, U2 or U3 - 3

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Specialized Menu for U1, U2 or U3 - 4

text_image User settings Save user settings -- Reset user settings -- Shooting mode Focal length (35mm equiv.) Photo info Virtual horizon display Initial monitor display
OptionDescription
Save user settingsAllows you to save the current settings. 55
Reset user settingsAllows you to reset the settings saved in U1, U2 or U3.57
Shooting modeAllows you to select the standard shooting mode.Default setting: P Programmed autoThe current flexible program (when set to P), shutter speed (when set to S or M) or aperture value (when set to A or M) settings are also saved.49
Focal length (35mm equiv.)Allows you to set the zoom position for when the mode dial is set.Default setting: 28 mm-
Photo infoAllows you to set whether or not the virtual horizon, histogram and framing grid are displayed in the monitor. This setting is not applied to the setup menu settings.Default setting: No check marks99
Virtual horizon displayAllows you to set the virtual horizon display. This setting is not applied to the setup menu settings.·Default setting: Circle99
Initial monitor displayAllows you to set the information displayed in the monitor.·Default setting: Show info11
Flash modeAllows you to set the flash mode.·Default setting: Auto59
FocusAllows you to set the focus mode.·Default setting: Autofocus64
Self-timerAllows you to set the self-timer. Default setting: Off62
AF assistAllows you to enable or disable the AF-assist illuminator. This setting is not applied to the setup menu settings. Default setting: Auto99

Functions That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously

Some functions cannot be used with other menu settings.

Restricted functionSetting Description
Flash modeFocus mode(64)When (infinity) is selected, the flash is not available.
Image quality(72)When RAW (NRW) images are recorded, red-eye reduction processing is not performed even if (auto with red-eye reduction) is set (including JPEG images when both RAW (NRW) and JPEG images were recorded at the same time).
Continuous(73)The flash is not available.
Auto bracketing(72)The flash is not available.
Self-timer/ Smile timer/ Remote controlAF area mode(73)When Subject tracking is selected, the self-timer/smile timer/remote control are not available.
Focus modeAF area mode(73)When Subject tracking is selected, MF(manual focus) is not available.
Image qualityContinuous(73)When BSS, Multi-shot 16, Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected, RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine and RAW (NRW) + Normal are not available.
Auto bracketing(72)When White balance bracketing is selected, RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine and RAW (NRW) + Normal are not available.
Image sizeImage quality(72)When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW), Image size is fixed at 12M 4000×3000.When RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal is selected, Image size of the JPEG image can be set. Note, however, that 323984 × 2656 , 16-99M 3968×2232 and 1:13000 × 3000 cannot be selected.
Continuous(73)When Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected, Image size is fixed at 1M (1280 × 960 pixels).When Multi-shot 16 is selected, Image size is fixed at 5M (2560 × 1920 pixels).
Restricted functionSetting Description
ISO sensitivityContinuous(73)When Multi-shot 16, Continuous H: 120fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected, ISO sensitivity is fixed at Auto.
Active D-Lighting(74)When ISO sensitivity is set to Auto and Active D-Lighting is set to any mode other than Off, the maximum value for ISO sensitivity is set to ISO 800.When Active D-Lighting is set to any mode other than Off, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200 and Hi 1 in ISO sensitivity are not available.
Shooting mode of Movie custom setting(96)If ISO sensitivity is set to Auto when Shooting mode is Manual, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.When Shooting mode is Special effects, ISO sensitivity is switched to Auto.
White balancePicture Control(72)When Monochrome is selected, White balance is fixed at Auto (normal).
Picture ControlActive D-Lighting(74)When using Active D-Lighting, Contrast in manual adjustment cannot be adjusted.
Shooting mode of Movie custom setting(96)When Shooting mode is Special effects, Picture Control is not available.
MeteringActive D-Lighting(74)When Active D-Lighting is set to any mode other than Off, Metering is reset to Matrix.
Restricted functionSetting Description
Continuous/Auto bracketingContinuous (73)/Auto bracketing (72)Continuous and Auto bracketing are not available simultaneously.
Self-timer (62)/Remote control (58)When self-timer or the Remote Control ML-L3 is used, a single image is shot even if Continuous H, Continuous M, Continuous L, or BSS has been set.
Smile timer (63)When the camera detects smiling faces and the shutter is released, only one image is shot. If Intvl timer shooting is set, shooting finishes automatically after one image is shot.
Image quality (72)When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal, BSS, Multi-shot 16, Continuous H: 120 fps, Continuous H: 60 fps and White balance bracketing are not available.
Picture Control (72)When Monochrome is selected, White balance bracketing is not available.
AF area modeSmile timer (63)The camera captures images using face detection regardless of the applied AF area mode option.
Focus mode (64)When set to MF (manual focus), the AF area mode cannot be set.
Picture Control (72)When Target finding AF is selected and Picture Control is set to Monochrome, AF area mode operates using the Auto setting.
White balance (72)When Target finding AF is selected, and if the white balance is set to Preset manual, Incandescent, Fluorescent FL3 or Choose color temp., or fine adjustment of white balance is performed, the camera focuses on a face or selects one or more of the 9 focus areas containing the subject closest to the camera.
Autofocus modeSmile timer(63)Autofocus mode option cannot be changed when the smile timer is selected.
Focus mode(64)When the focus mode is set to (infinity), the autofocus mode operates using the Single AF setting.
AF area mode(73)When AF area mode is set to Face priority, Subject tracking or Target finding AF, Single AF is automatically selected.
Built-in ND filterShooting mode of Movie custom setting(96)When Shooting mode is set to Special effects, the built-in ND filter is automatically controlled.
Active D-LightingISO sensitivity(72)When ISO sensitivity is set to 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200 or Hi 1, Active D-Lighting is not available.
Photo infoSmile timer(63)The virtual horizon is not displayed when the smile timer is selected.
AF area mode(73)The virtual horizon is not displayed when Face priority is selected.The virtual horizon is not displayed when Subject tracking is selected. After the subject has been registered (during subject tracking), the histogram is not displayed.The virtual horizon and histogram are not displayed when Target finding AF is selected.
Print dateImage quality(72)When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal, date cannot be imprinted on images.
Continuous(73)When Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected, date cannot be imprinted on images.
Sound settingsContinuous(73)When Continuous H, Continuous M, Continuous L, Continuous H: 120 fps, Continuous H: 60 fps, BSS, or Multi-shot 16 is selected, shutter sound is disabled.
Auto bracketing(72)When AE Bracketing (Tv), AE Bracketing (Av) or AE Bracketing (Sv) is selected, shutter sound is disabled.
Digital zoomSmile timer(63)When the smile timer is selected, digital zoom is not available.
Focus mode(64)When MF (manual focus) is selected, digital zoom is not available.
Image quality(72)When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal, digital zoom is not available.
Continuous(73)When Multi-shot 16 is selected, digital zoom is not available.
AF area mode(73)When Subject tracking is selected, digital zoom is not available.
Zoom memory(4, 74)When the Fn1 button is held down, digital zoom is not available.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously - 1

Notes About Digital Zoom

  • Depending on the shooting mode or the current settings, digital zoom may not be available (81).
  • When digital zoom is in effect, selectable options for AF area mode or metering mode are restricted.

Focusing

The focus area varies depending on the shooting mode.

Focusing in (Auto) Mode or EFFECTS Mode

- The camera automatically selects one or more of the 9 focus areas containing the subject closest to the camera when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. When the subject is in focus, the focus areas that are in focus glow green.

- In special effects mode, the method of how the camera selects the focus area for autofocus can be changed by selecting AF area mode (73) in the shooting menu.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Focusing in (Auto) Mode or EFFECTS Mode - 1

text_image 1/250 R5.55.6

Focus areas

Using the Target Finding AF

When AF area mode (default setting: Center (normal)) in P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 mode is set to Target finding AF, the camera operates in the manner described below when you press the shutter-release button halfway.

- The camera detects the main subject and focuses on it. When the subject is in focus, the focus area glows green. If a human face is detected, the camera automatically sets focus priority on it. - If no main subject is detected, the camera operates in the same manner as in (auto) mode.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using the Target Finding AF - 1

natural_image Two stylized flower illustrations inside a square frame, set against a leafy background (no text or symbols)

Focus areas

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using the Target Finding AF - 2

Notes About Target Finding AF

- Depending on shooting conditions, the subject that the camera determines to be the main subject may vary.

- The main subject may not be detected when using certain White balance or Picture Control settings.

- The camera may not detect the main subject appropriately in the following situations:

  • When the subject is very dark or bright
  • When the main subject lacks clearly defined colors
  • When the shot is framed so that the main subject is on the edge of the monitor
  • When the main subject is composed of a repeating pattern

Using Face Detection

In the following settings, the camera uses face detection to automatically focus on human faces.

  • Scene auto selector, Portrait, or Night portrait scene mode (39)
    • (Smile timer) (63)
  • When AF area mode (73) is set to Face priority

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using Face Detection - 1

text_image P QUAL NR 1/250 F5.65.6 [12:30]

If the camera detects more than one face, a double border is displayed around the face that the camera focuses on, and single borders are displayed around the other faces.

If the shutter-release button is pressed halfway when no faces are detected:

  • When Scene auto selector is selected, the focus area changes depending on the scene.
  • In Portrait and Night portrait scene modes, the camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame.
  • When 📋 (smile timer) is selected, the camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.
  • When AF area mode is set to Face priority, the camera selects the focus area containing the subject closest to the camera.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using Face Detection - 2

Notes About Face Detection

  • The camera's ability to detect faces depends on a variety of factors, including the direction in which the faces are looking.
    • The camera may be unable to detect faces in the following situations:

- When faces are partially hidden by sunglasses or otherwise obstructed

- When faces take up too much or too little of the frame

Using Skin Softening

When the shutter is released while using one of the shooting modes listed below, the camera detects human faces and processes the image to soften facial skin tones (up to 3 faces).

- Scene auto selector, Portrait or Night portrait in scene mode (39)

Skin softening can also be applied to saved images (88).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using Skin Softening - 1

Notes About Skin Softening

  • It may take more time than usual to save images after shooting.
  • Under some shooting conditions, the desired skin softening results may not be achieved, and skin softening may be applied to areas of the image where there are no faces.

Subjects Not Suitable for Autofocus

The camera may not focus as expected in the following situations. In some rare cases, the subject may not be in focus despite the fact that the focus area or focus indicator glows green:

  • Subject is very dark
  • Objects of sharply differing brightness are included in the scene (e.g. the sun behind the subject makes that subject appear very dark)
  • No contrast between the subject and surroundings (e.g. a portrait subject wearing a white shirt is standing in front of a white wall)
  • Several objects are at different distances from the camera (e.g. the subject is inside a cage)
  • Subjects with repeating patterns (window blinds, buildings with multiple rows of similarly shaped windows, etc.)
  • Subject is moving rapidly

In the situations noted above, try pressing the shutter-release button halfway to refocus several times, or focus on another subject positioned at the same distance from the camera as the actual desired subject, and use focus lock (85).

The camera can also focus using manual focus (64, 66).

Focus Lock

Focus lock shooting is recommended when the camera does not activate the focus area that contains the desired subject.

1 Set AF area mode to Center (normal) (73).

- AF area mode can be set when the shooting mode is P, S, A, M, U1, U2, U3, or special effects.

2 Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-release button halfway.

  • Confirm that the focus area glows green.
    • Focus and exposure are locked.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-release button halfway. - 1

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-release button halfway. - 2

natural_image Black-and-white photo of a sunflower with mountainous background (no readable text or symbols)

3 Without lifting your finger, recompose the picture.

• Make sure to maintain the same distance between the camera and the subject.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Without lifting your finger, recompose the picture. - 1

natural_image Illustration of a sunflower with a sailboat on water, mountains in background (no text or symbols)

4 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the picture.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the picture. - 1

Using the AE-L/AF-L Button for Focus Lock

You can lock the exposure and focus while holding down the AE-L/AF-L button (100) instead of pressing the shutter-release button halfway.

Playback Features

Playback Zoom

Moving the zoom control toward T(Q) in full-frame playback mode (36) zooms in on the image.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Playback Zoom - 1

text_image T W F FN2 ON/OFF

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Playback Zoom - 2

text_image 15/11/2 018:15:30 00:00:15:30 T (○) W (□) Displayed area guide Image is zoomed in. Image is displayed

full-frame.

  • You can change the zoom ratio by moving the zoom control toward W (☐) or T (Q). The zoom can also be adjusted by rotating the command dial.
    • To view a different area of the image, press the multi selector ▲▼◀▶.
  • If you are viewing an image that was captured using face detection or pet detection, the camera zooms in on the face detected at the time of shooting (except images captured using Continuous, AE Bracketing (Tv), AE Bracketing (Av) or AE Bracketing (Sv)). To zoom in on an area of the image where there are no faces, adjust the zoom ratio and then press ▲▼◀▶.
  • When a zoomed image is displayed, press the ⓄK button to return to full-frame playback mode.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Playback Zoom - 3

Cropping Images

When a zoomed image is displayed, you can press the MENU button to crop the image to include only the visible portion and save it as a separate file (17).

Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display

Moving the zoom control toward W (☐) in full-frame playback mode (☐36) displays images as thumbnails.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display - 1

text_image W W T FN2 ONLY OFF

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display - 2

text_image 15/11/2013 15:30 15:00 15:00/2 0004.JPG 00.04.JPG 0004.JPG

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display - 3

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display - 4

text_image 1 1 3 2 04

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display - 5

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display - 6

text_image 2013 11 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 28 29 3024 25 26 27

Thumbnail DisplayFull-frame Displayar Display

  • You can change the number of thumbnails displayed by moving the zoom control toward W (☐) or T (Q).
  • While using thumbnail playback mode, use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ or rotate it to select an image, and then press the ⓄK button to display that image full-frame.
  • While using calendar display mode, use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ or rotate it to select a date, and then press the ⓄK button to display the images captured on that day.
  • An image or date can also be selected by rotating the command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display - 7

Calendar Display

Images captured when the camera's date is not set are treated as images captured on January 1, 2013.

Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Playback Menu)

When viewing images in full-frame playback mode or thumbnail playback mode, you can configure the playback menu settings listed below by pressing the MENU button (12).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Playback Menu) - 1

text_image 15/7/16/2013 15:30 0:30:41:00 MENU

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Playback Menu) - 2

text_image Playback menu Quick retouch D-Lighting Skin softening Filter effects Print order Slide show Delete
Option Description
Quick retouch1Allows you to create retouched copies in which contrast and saturation have been enhanced.10
D-Lighting1Allows you to create copies with enhanced brightness and contrast, brightening dark portions of an image.10
Skin softening1Detects faces in images and creates a copy with softer facial skin tones.11
Filter effects1Allows you to apply a variety of effects using digital filter. The available effects are Soft, Selective color, Cross screen, Fisheye, Miniature effect, Painting and Vignette.12
Print order2Allows you to select which images are printed, and how many copies of each image are printed, prior to printing.62
Slide showAllows you to view images in an automatic slide show.64
Delete2Deletes an image. Multiple images can be deleted.65
Protect2Protects selected images and movies from accidental deletion.66
Rotate image2Allows you to rotate the displayed image to portrait or landscape orientation.66
Small picture1Creates a small copy of images. 13
Voice memoAllows you to use the camera's microphone to record voice memos and attach them to images.67
Copy2Allows you to copy images between the internal memory and a memory card. This function can also be used to copy movies.68
Black border1Creates a new image surrounded by a black border.14
Straighten1Compensates for the slanting of images taken.15
NRW RAW (NRW) processing1,2Creates JPEG-format copies by performing RAW processing within the camera for RAW (NRW) images without having to use a computer.15
Sequence display optionsAllows you to select whether to display only the key picture for a sequence of images captured continuously or to display the sequence as individual images.When only the key picture is displayed for a sequence, press the OK button to display each image in the sequence. Press the multi selector ▲ to return to the key picture display.69
Choose key picture2Allows you to change the key picture for images captured in sequence.69

1 Edited images are saved as separate files. Some images may not be edited.

2 Select an image on the image selection screen. See "Using the Screen for Selecting Images" (☐90) for more information.

Using the Screen for Selecting Images

When an image selection screen such as the one shown on the right is displayed while operating the camera, follow the procedures described below to select the images.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using the Screen for Selecting Images - 1

text_image Erase selected images MEN Back ON/OFF

1 Use the multi selector ◀▶ or rotate it to select the desired image.

  • Move the zoom control (☐1) toward T (☐) to switch to full-frame playback, or W (☐) to switch to thumbnail playback.
  • Only one image can be selected for Rotate image, Choose key picture, and Welcome screen. Proceed to step 3.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector ◀▶ or rotate it to select the desired image. - 1

text_image Erase selected images MENU Back ON/OFF

2 Use ▲▼ to select ON or OFF (or the number of copies).

- When ON is selected, a check mark (♥) is displayed with the image. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional images.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use ▲▼ to select ON or OFF (or the number of copies). - 1

text_image Erase selected images MENU Back ON/OFF

3 Press the Ⓞ button to apply the image selection.

- With selections such as Selected images, a confirmation dialog is displayed. Follow the instructions displayed in the monitor.

Recording and Playing Back Movies

Recording Movies

Movies can be recorded using the following two modes.

▶(movie) modeYou can perform basic movie recording. When Movie options is set to HS movies, you can record slow motion movies and fast motion movies (31).
▶CSM (movie custom setting) modeYou can set the Shooting mode and ISO sensitivity and enjoy recording more authentic movies.

1 Rotate the mode dial to ▶ (or ▶ CSM).

  • Check the remaining amount of movie recording time.
  • When Shooting mode (96) of the movie custom setting mode is set to

Aperture-priority auto or Manual, set the aperture value or shutter speed

before recording a movie (49). The aperture value and shutter speed cannot be set during movie recording.

Movie recording time remaining
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Rotate the mode dial to ▶ (or ▶ CSM). - 1

text_image Camera interface screenshot showing dial settings and a woman's photo with time display

2 Press the shutter-release button all the way to start recording.

• The camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame.
- See "Focusing During Movie Recording" (93) for more information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button all the way to start recording. - 1

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button all the way to start recording. - 2

text_image 7m23s

3 Press the shutter-release button all the way to end recording.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button all the way to end recording. - 1

Maximum Movie Length

Individual movie files cannot exceed 4 GB in size or 29 minutes in length, even when there is sufficient free space on the memory card for longer recording.

  • The maximum movie length for a single movie is displayed on the shooting screen.
  • Recording may end before either limit is reached if camera temperature becomes elevated.
  • The actual movie length may vary depending on the movie content, subject movement, or type of memory card.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Maximum Movie Length - 1

Notes About Saving Images and Recording Movies

The indicator showing the number of exposures remaining or the indicator showing the maximum movie length flashes while images are being saved or while a movie is being recorded. Do not open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover or remove the battery or memory card while an indicator is flashing. Doing this could result in loss of data, or in damage to the camera or the memory card.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Saving Images and Recording Movies - 1

Notes About Movie Recording

  • Memory cards with an SD Speed Class rating of 6 or faster are recommended when recording movies (25). Movie recording may stop unexpectedly when a memory card with a lower Speed Class rating is used.
  • The sounds of zoom control operation, zoom, autofocus lens drive movement, vibration reduction, and aperture operation when brightness changes may be recorded.
  • The following phenomena may be seen in the monitor while recording movies. These phenomena are saved in the recorded movies.
  • Banding may occur in images under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, or sodium-vapor lighting.
  • Subjects that move quickly from one side of the frame to the other, such as a moving train or car, may appear skewed.
  • The entire movie image may be skewed when the camera is panned.
  • Lighting or other bright areas may leave residual images when the camera is moved.
  • Depending on the distance to the subject or the amount of zoom applied, subjects with repeating patterns (fabrics, lattice windows, etc.) may have colored stripes (interference patterns, moire, etc.) in them during movie recording and playback. This occurs when the pattern in the subject and the layout of the image sensor interfere with each other; it is not a malfunction.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Movie Recording - 1

Notes About Using Zoom During Movie Recording

  • The zoom indicator is not displayed during movie recording.
  • There may be some degradation in image quality when digital zoom is used. When recording movies, digital zoom operates up to approximately 2× the maximum optical zoom ratio. If you zoom in on the subject while recording a movie, the zoom motion temporarily stops at the position where optical zoom is changed to digital zoom.
  • When Shooting mode (96) of the movie custom setting mode is set to Aperture-priority auto or Manual, optical zoom cannot be used during movie recording.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Using Zoom During Movie Recording - 1

Camera Temperature

  • The camera may become warm when recording movies for an extended period of time or when the camera is used in a hot area.
  • If the inside of the camera becomes extremely hot when recording movies, the camera will automatically stop recording. The amount of time remaining until the camera stops recording (10s) is displayed. After the camera stops recording, it turns itself off.

Leave the camera off until the inside of the camera has cooled.

Focusing During Movie Recording

- The focus can be adjusted during movie recording in the following manner in accordance with the Autofocus mode (96) setting of the movie menu.

  • AF-S Single AF (default setting): The focus is locked when movie recording starts. To perform the autofocus function during movie recording, press the AE-L/AF-L button (☐2).
  • AF-F Full-time AF: The focus is adjusted repeatedly even during movie recording. To lock the exposure or focus during movie recording, press the AE-L/AF-L button. To cancel the lock, press the AE-L/AF-L button again.

- When the focus mode (64) is MF (manual focus), adjust the focus manually. The focus can be adjusted by using the multi selector ▲ (far)▼ (near) while recording movies.

- Autofocus may not perform as expected (☐84). Should this occur, try MF (manual focus) (☐64, 66) or set Autofocus mode in the movie menu to AF-S Single AF (default setting) and then use focus lock (☐85) to record.

Functions Available in Movie Mode and Movie Custom Setting Mode

  • Self-timer (62)
  • Focus mode (64)
  • Exposure compensation (69)
  • Quick menu (70)
  • Movie menu (96)
  • Setup menu (99)

Functions That Can Be Set Using the 🔒 Button (Quick Menu: When Recording Movies)

Available functions differ according to the movie mode.

- See "Basic Quick Menu Operations" (70) for how to set the quick menu options.

FunctionCSM
QUALMovie options
ISOISO sensitivity -
WBWhite balance
BKTAuto bracketing --
MyMy Menu --
Picture Control -
Option Description
QUALMovie optionsAllows you to select the movie type.Select normal speed to record movies at normal speed,or HS (high speed) to record movies that play in slow orfast motion.Only normal speed movies can be selected in ▶CSM (movie custom setting) mode.Default setting: 1080★/30p or 1080★/25p30
ISOISO sensitivityAllows you to control the camera's sensitivity to light.Default setting: AutoIf ISO sensitivity is set to Auto when Shooting mode of the movie custom setting menu (96) is Manual, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.33
WBWhite balanceAllows you to adjust white balance to suit the weatherconditions or light source in order to make the colors inimages match what you see with your eyes.Default setting: Auto (normal)35
PictureControl(COOLPIXPictureControl)Allows you to change the settings for image recordingaccording to the shooting scene or your preferences.Can be set when Shooting mode (96) of themovie custom setting menu is set to Aperture-priority auto or Manual.Default setting: Standard40

Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Movie and Movie Custom Setting Menus)

In movie mode or movie custom setting mode, press the MENU button to set the following menu options (12).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Movie and Movie Custom Setting Menus) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Camera Mode"] --> B["Menu"]
    B --> C["Movie menu"]
    C --> D["Custom setting menu"]

Available functions differ according to the movie mode.

FunctionmovieCSM (movie custom setting)
Shooting mode - √
Custom Picture Control - √
Autofocus mode √
Built-in ND filter - √
Wind noise reduction √
Option Description
Shooting modeAllows you to set the standard shooting mode.Default setting:Aperture-priority autoWhenSpecial effectsis selected, also allows you to select a shooting effect (46) (default setting: Painting).70
Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control)Allows you to customize the settings of COOLPIX Picture Control (95) and register them inCustom 1 orCustom 2 ofPicture Controlin the quick menu.44
Autofocus modeAllows you to select eitherSingle AF, which locks focus when movie recording begins, orFull-time AF, which continues focusing during movie recording.Default setting:Single AF71
Built-in ND filterAllows you to select On or Off for the built-in ND filter.Default setting: OffWhen Shooting mode of the movie custom setting menu is set to Special effects, the built-in ND filter is automatically controlled.
Wind noise reductionAllows you to set whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie recording.Default setting: Off

Playing Back Movies

Press the ▶ button to enter playback mode. Movies are indicated by the movie options icon (95, 30). Press the OK button to play back movies.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Playing Back Movies - 1

text_image 15/11/2013 15:30 004.MOV OK : [ 22m16s ]

- To adjust the volume, move the zoom control (1).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Playing Back Movies - 2

text_image 7m42s

Volume indicator

Functions Available During Playback

Rotate the multi selector or the main command dial to fast forward or rewind.

Playback controls are displayed at the top of the monitor.

The operations listed below can be performed by using the multi selector ◀ or sub-command dial to select a control and then pressing the Ⓞ button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions Available During Playback - 1

text_image Paused [ 7m42s ]
Function Icon Description
RewindHold down the OK button to rewind the movie.
AdvanceHold down the OK button to advance the movie.
Pause IIPause playback. The operations listed below can be performed while paused.
Rewind the movie one frame.Hold down the OK button for continuous rewinding.*
Advance the movie one frame.Hold down the OK button for continuous advancing.*
Resume playback.
Extract the desired portion of a movie and save it as a separate file.
Extract a single frame of a movie and save it as a still image.
End Return to full-frame playback mode.

* The movie can also be advanced or rewound by one frame by rotating the multi selector or main command dial.

Deleting Movies

To delete a movie, select the desired movie in full-frame playback mode (36) or thumbnail playback mode (87) and press the button (37).

General Camera Setup

Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Setup Menu)

Press the MENU button → ♀ (setup) tab (13)

The settings of the menu options listed below can be configured.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions That Can Be Set with the MENU Button (Setup Menu) - 1

text_image Set up Welcome screen -- Time zone and date -- Monitor settings -- Print date OFF Self-timer: after release ON Vibration reduction (A) AF assist AUTO
Option Description
Welcome screenAllows you to select whether or not the welcome screen is displayed when the camera is turned on.72
Time zone and dateAllows you to set the camera clock.73
Monitor settingsAllows you to adjust post-shooting image review, monitor brightness, and photo information display settings.75
Print dateAllows you to imprint the shooting date and time on images.77
Self-timer: after releaseAllows you to select whether or not to cancel the setting after shooting images with the self-timer.78
Vibration reductionAllows you to select the vibration reduction setting used when shooting.79
AF assistAllows you to enable or disable the AF-assist illuminator.80
ISO sensitivity step valueAllows you to set the step value of the sensitivity to be set for ISO sensitivity of the quick menu.80
Digital zoom Allows you to set the operation of digital zoom.81
Zoom speed Allows you to set the zoom operation speed.82
Fixed apertureWhen set to On, zoom operates while keeping changes in the aperture value to a minimum in A or M shooting mode.82
Sound settings Allows you to adjust sound settings.883
Record orientationAllows you to set whether or not to record the "tall" orientation data on the images that are shot with the camera held in "tall" orientation.883
Rotate tallAllows you to set whether or not to rotate the images in accordance with the "tall" or landscape orientation of the camera during playback.884
Auto offAllows you to set the amount of time that passes before the monitor turns off to save power.884
Format memory/Format cardAllows you to format the internal memory or the memory card.885
LanguageAllows you to change the camera's display language.885
TV settings Allows you to adjust TV-connection settings.886
External mic sensitivityAllows you to set the external microphone sensitivity.886
Customize command dialsAllows you to swap the function of the main command dial for that of the sub-command dial when the exposure is set (49).887
Command dial rotationAllows you to set the direction of operation when the command dial is rotated during shooting.887
Multi selector right pressWhen set to AF area mode, the AF area mode setting is displayed if the multi selector ▶ ([+] ) is pressed during shooting.888
Delete button optionsWhen set to Press twice to delete, the image can be deleted by pressing the [1] button again while the delete confirmation message is displayed.888
AE/AF lock buttonAllows you to select the function to be performed when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed during shooting.889
Fn1 + shutter buttonAllows you to set the function to be performed when the shutter-release button is pressed while pressing the Fn1 (function 1) button during shooting.90
Fn1 + command dialAllows you to set the function to be performed when the command dial is rotated while pressing the Fn1 (function 1) button during shooting.91
Fn1 + selector dialAllows you to set the function to be performed when the multi selector is rotated while pressing the Fn1 (function 1) button during shooting.91
Fn1 guide displayAllows you to set whether or not to display guides for the functions assigned to Fn1 + shutter button, Fn1 + command dial and Fn1 + selector dial in the monitor, when the Fn1 (function 1) button is pressed during shooting.92
Fn2 buttonAllows you to set the operation to be performed when the Fn2 (function 2) button is pressed.92
Customize My MenuAllows you to register frequently used menu items in My Menu (72) (up to 5 items).93
Reset file numberingAllows you to reset the sequential numbering of file numbers when Yes is selected.94
Accessory terminalAllows you to configure settings for the optional Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10 or GPS unit when either one is attached to the accessory terminal.95
Eye-Fi uploadAllows you to set whether or not to enable the function for sending images to a computer using a commercially available Eye-Fi card.96
MF distance indicator unitsAllows you to set the unit of distance for displaying at screen gauge, to either m (meter) or ft (feet) when using manual focus.97
Reverse indicatorsAllows you to set the +/- display direction of indicators that are displayed for setting the exposure and bracketing when shooting mode is M.97
Flash controlWhen set to Auto, the external flash unit (optional) fires when it is attached to the camera.97
Reset allAllows you to reset the camera's settings to their default values.98
Firmware version Viewthe current camera firmware version.98

Connecting the Camera to a TV, Computer, or Printer

Connection Methods

You can enhance your enjoyment of images and movies by connecting the camera to a TV, computer, or printer.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Connection Methods - 1

text_image Open the connector cover. HDMI mini connector (Type C) USB/audio/video output connector Insert the plug straight.

- Before connecting the camera to an external device, make sure the remaining battery level is sufficient and turn the camera off. Before disconnecting, make sure to turn the camera off.

- If the AC Adapter EH-5b and the Power Connector EP-5A (available separately) (104) are used, this camera can be powered from an electrical outlet. Do not use any other make or model of AC adapter or power connector as it may cause the camera to heat up or malfunction.

- For information about the connection methods and subsequent operations, refer to the documentation included with the device in addition to this document.

Viewing images on a TV 🎨18

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Viewing images on a TV 🎨18 - 1

Images and movies captured with the camera can be viewed on a TV.

Connection method: Connect the video and audio plugs of the optional Audio Video Cable EG-CP16 (104) to the TV's input jacks. Alternatively, connect a commercially available HDMI cable to the TV's HDMI input jack.

Viewing and organizing images on a computer 104

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Viewing and organizing images on a computer 104 - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a laptop computer with blank screen and keyboard (no text or symbols)

You can transfer images to a computer to perform simple retouching and manage image data.

Connection method: Connect the camera to the computer's USB port with the included USB cable.

- Before connecting to a computer, install ViewNX 2 on the computer (104).

Printing images without using a computer 📞20

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Printing images without using a computer 📞20 - 1

If you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer, you can print images without using a computer.

Connection method: Connect the camera directly to the printer's USB port with the included USB cable.

Using ViewNX 2

ViewNX 2 is an all-in-one software package which enables you to transfer, view, edit and share images. Install ViewNX 2 using the included ViewNX 2 CD-ROM.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using ViewNX 2 - 1

text_image Your Imaging Toolbox ViewNX 2™

Installing ViewNX 2

Compatible Operating Systems Windows

Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows XP

Macintosh

Mac OS X 10.6, 10.7, 10.8

Refer to the Nikon website for details on system requirements, including the latest information on operating system compatibility.

1 Start the computer and insert the ViewNX 2 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

  • Windows: If instructions for operating the CD-ROM are displayed in the window, follow the instructions to proceed to the installation window.
  • Mac OS: When the ViewNX 2 window is displayed, double-click the Welcome icon.

2 Select a language in the language selection dialog to open the installation window.

  • If the desired language is not available, click Region Selection to choose a different region and then choose the desired language (the Region Selection button is not available in the European release).
  • Click Next to display the installation window.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select a language in the language selection dialog to open the installation window. - 1

text_image Alison Welcome to the world of Nikon digital photography. Please submit your language from the drive-share list. Design Use Help Alison ViewNX 2™ Typical Installation (Recommended) Custom Installation ReadNX 2, which enables you to store, edit, view and transfer photos, and all other required software will be installed. Installation Quick Help

3 Start the installer.

  • We recommend clicking Installation Guide in the installation window to check the installation help information and system requirements before installing ViewNX 2.
  • Click Typical Installation (Recommended) in the installation window.
  • Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.

4 Exit the installer when the installation completion screen is displayed.

  • Windows: Click Yes.
  • Mac OS: Click OK.

The following software is installed:

• ViewNX 2 (consisting of the three modules below)
- Nikon Transfer 2: For transferring images to the computer
- ViewNX 2: For viewing, editing, and printing transferred images
- Nikon Movie Editor: For basic editing of transferred movies
- Panorama Maker (for creating a single panorama photo using a series of images shot in panorama assist scene mode)

5 Remove the ViewNX 2 CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.

Transferring Images to the Computer

1 Choose how images will be copied to the computer.

Choose one of the following methods:

- Direct USB connection: Turn the camera off and ensure that the memory card is inserted in the camera. Connect the camera to the computer using the included USB cable. The camera automatically turns on. To transfer images that are saved in the camera's internal memory, remove the memory card from the camera before connecting it to the computer.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Choose how images will be copied to the computer. - 1

text_image Diagram showing a DSLR camera connected to a laptop via USB cable, with an icon illustrating the cable being inserted into a device.
  • S D card slot : If your computer is equipped with an SD card slot, the card can be inserted directly in the slot.
  • SD card reader: Connect a card reader (available separately from third-party suppliers) to the computer and insert the memory card.

If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2.

- When using Windows 7

If the dialog shown at right is displayed, follow the steps below to select Nikon Transfer 2.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Choose how images will be copied to the computer. - 2

text_image P7821 Microsoft Office 1763.com PC 120-500000 C:\Users\Software\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\My Documents\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port/Case port/Case\nInitial port / 120000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

1 Under Import pictures and videos, click Change

program. A program

selection dialog will be

displayed; select Import File using Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.

2 Double-click Import File.

If the memory card contains a large number of images, it may take a while for Nikon Transfer 2 to start. Wait until Nikon Transfer 2 starts.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Choose how images will be copied to the computer. - 3

Connecting the USB Cable

The connection may not be recognized if the camera is connected to the computer via a USB hub.

2 Transfer images to the computer.

  • Confirm that the name of the connected camera or removable disk is displayed as the "Source" on the "Options" title bar of Nikon Transfer 2 (1).
  • Click Start Transfer ( ②).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Transfer images to the computer. - 1

text_image 1 2 P7800 C:\WINDOWS\PTS B:\WINDOWS\PTG C:\WINDOWS\PTG B:\WINDOWS\PTG C:\WINDOWS\PTG Start Preview
  • At default settings, all the images on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
  • Images are displayed in ViewNX 2 when transfer is complete.

3 Terminate the connection.

  • If the camera is connected to the computer, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable.
  • If you are using a card reader or card slot, choose the appropriate option in the computer operating system to eject the removable disk corresponding to the memory card and then remove the card from the card reader or card slot.

Starting ViewNX 2 Manually

  • Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on the desktop.
    • Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.
  • Consult online help for more information on using ViewNX 2.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Starting ViewNX 2 Manually - 1

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Starting ViewNX 2 Manually - 2

natural_image Simple icon of a black-and-white action button inside a rounded square (no text or symbols)

Reference Section

The Reference Section provides detailed information and hints about using the camera.

Shooting

Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playback)....2

Viewing and Deleting Images Captured Continuously

(Sequence) 7

Editing Still Images ...... 🎨9

Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV)......18

Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print) ......20

Editing Movies 25

The Quick Menu....27

The Shooting Menu (P, S, A or M Mode)....44

The Playback Menu....62

The Movie and Movie Custom Setting Menus....70

The Setup Menu....72

Additional Information

Error Messages ......○○99

File Names....103

Optional Accessories....104

Shooting with Remote Control ML-L3....106

Speedlights (External Flash Unit)....108

Using the GPS Unit....113

Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playback)

Shooting with Easy Panorama

Rotate the mode dial to SCENE → MENU button → Panorama

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select ➕ Easy panorama and press the Ⓞ button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shooting with Easy Panorama - 1

text_image Panorama Easy panorama Panorama assist

2 Select ▶STD Normal (180°) or ▶WIDE Wide (360°) as the shooting range and press the ⓄK button.

- When the camera is readied in the horizontal position, the image size (width × height) is as follows.

- ^STD Normal (180°): 3200 × 560 when moved horizontally, 1024 × 3200 when moved vertically

- WIDE Wide (360°): 6400 × 560 when moved horizontally, 1024 × 6400 when moved vertically

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shooting with Easy Panorama - 2

text_image Easy panorama Normal (180°) Wide (360°)

3 Frame the first edge of the panorama scene, and then press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.

• The zoom position is fixed at wide-angle.
- The camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shooting with Easy Panorama - 3

natural_image Black-and-white cityscape photo with palm trees and buildings, no visible text or symbols

4 Press the shutter-release button all the way, and then remove your finger from the shutter-release button.

- △▽◀▶ are displayed to indicate the direction of camera movement.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shooting with Easy Panorama - 4

natural_image Black-and-white cityscape photo showing modern high-rise buildings under cloudy sky, with no visible text or symbols

5 Move the camera in one of the four directions until the guide indicator reaches the end.

- When the camera detects which direction it is moving in, shooting begins.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shooting with Easy Panorama - 5

text_image Guide

Example of Camera Movement

- Using your body as the axis of rotation, move the camera slowly in an arc, in the direction of the marking ( ).

- Shooting stops if the guide does not reach the edge within about 15 seconds (when STD Normal (180°) is selected) or within about 30 seconds (when WIDE Wide (360°) is selected) after shooting starts.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Example of Camera Movement - 1

natural_image Illustration of three women holding a camera, with curved arrows indicating motion or direction (no text or symbols)

Notes About Easy Panorama Shooting

- The range of the image seen in the saved image is narrower than that seen in the monitor at the time of shooting.

- If the camera is moved too quickly or shaken too much, or if the subject is too uniform (e.g. walls or darkness), an error may occur.

- If shooting is stopped before the camera reaches the half-way point in the panorama range, a panorama image is not saved.

- If more than half of the panorama range is captured but shooting ends before reaching the edge of the range, the range not captured is recorded and displayed in gray.

Viewing Images Captured with Easy Panorama

Switch to playback mode (36), display an image captured using easy panorama in full-frame playback mode, and then press the OK button to scroll the image in the direction that was used when shooting.

- Rotate the multi selector to scroll forward or backward quickly.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Viewing Images Captured with Easy Panorama - 1

text_image 15/11/2013 15:30 0004.JPG 4/ 132

Playback controls are displayed at the top of the monitor during playback.

Use the multi selector ◀▶ to select a control, and then press the ⓄK button to perform the following operations.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Viewing Images Captured with Easy Panorama - 2

natural_image Black-and-white cityscape photo with palm trees and distant mountains under cloudy sky (no visible text or symbols)
Function Icon Description
RewindHold down the Ⓞ button to scroll backward quickly.*
AdvanceHold down the Ⓞ button to scroll forward quickly.*
Pause IIPause playback. The operations listed below can be performed while paused.
Hold down the Ⓞ button to rewind.*
Hold down the Ⓞ button to scroll.*
Resume automatic scrolling.
End ■ Switch to full-frame playback mode.

* These operations can also be performed by rotating the multi selector.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Viewing Images Captured with Easy Panorama - 3

Notes About Scroll Playback

This camera may not be able to scroll the playback of, or zoom in on, easy panorama images captured with another make or model of digital camera.

Using a tripod makes the composition easier. When using a tripod to stabilize the camera, set Vibration reduction (6-79) to Off in the setup menu.

Rotate the mode dial to SCENE → MENU button → Panorama

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select ☐Panorama assist and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Scroll Playback - 1

text_image Panorama Easy panorama Panorama assist

2 Use ▲▼◀▶ to select the direction in which images are joined, and press the ⓄK button.

  • Apply flash mode (59), self-timer (62)/remote control (106), focus mode (64) and exposure compensation (69) settings in this step, if necessary.
  • Press the OK button to reselect the direction.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Scroll Playback - 2

text_image 1/250 F3.F3.0 1280

3 Frame the first edge of the panorama scene, and take the first image.

• The camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame.
- About 1/3 of the image will be displayed as translucent.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Scroll Playback - 3

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Scroll Playback - 4

text_image QUAL [ ] 1/250 F3.F3.0 1 12801 NORYL24

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Scroll Playback - 5

4 Shoot the next image.

- Match the outline of the next image so that 1/3 of the frame overlaps the previous image, and press the shutter-release button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shoot the next image. - 1

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shoot the next image. - 2

natural_image Black-and-white cityscape photo showing modern high-rise buildings and waterfront (no visible text or symbols)

5 Press the ⓄK button when shooting is completed.

• The camera returns to step 2.

  • The panorama series is terminated if the auto off function (884) triggers the standby mode during shooting. To prevent this, setting a longer time for the auto off function is recommended.
  • Images cannot be deleted while shooting in panorama assist mode. When shooting a new image, return to step 2 and start over again.

AE/AF-L (Exposure Lock) Indicator

When using panorama assist mode, all images in the panorama have the same exposure, white balance, and focus as the first image of the panorama.

When the first image is shot, AE/AF-L is displayed in the monitor to indicate that exposure, white balance, and focus are locked.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AE/AF-L (Exposure Lock) Indicator - 1

text_image OK End M1-M2- [1279]

Panorama Creation with Panorama Maker

Transfer images to a computer (106) and use Panorama Maker to join them in a single panorama.

  • Panorama Maker can be installed on a computer using the included ViewNX 2 CD-ROM (104).
  • For more information on using Panorama Maker, refer to the on-screen instructions and help information contained in Panorama Maker.

Viewing and Deleting Images Captured Continuously (Sequence)

Viewing Images in a Sequence

Images captured continuously are saved as a sequence.

The first image of a sequence is used as the key picture to represent the sequence when displayed in full-frame playback mode or thumbnail playback mode (default setting).

To display each image in the sequence individually, press the OK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Viewing Images in a Sequence - 1

natural_image Black-and-white illustration of a woman by a lakeside with a sailboat and mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

After pressing the Ⓞ button, the operations listed below are available.

• To display the previous or next image, rotate the multi selector or press ◀.

- To display images that are not included in the sequence, press ▲ to return to the key picture display.

- To display images in a sequence as thumbnails, or to play them back in a slide show, set Sequence display options to Individual pictures in the playback menu (69).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Viewing Images in a Sequence - 2

text_image 13/11/2018 15:30 0004.JPG Back 1 / 5:1

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Viewing Images in a Sequence - 3

Sequence Display Options

Images captured continuously with cameras other than this camera cannot be displayed as a sequence.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Sequence Display Options - 1

Playback Menu Options Available When Using Sequence

  • When images in a sequence are displayed in full-frame playback mode, press the MENU button to select functions in playback menu (88).
  • If you press the MENU button when a key picture is displayed, the following settings can be applied to all images in the sequence:

- Print order, Protect, Copy

Deleting Images in a Sequence

When the ⏻ button is pressed for images in a sequence, the images that are deleted vary depending on how the sequences are displayed.

  • When the key picture is displayed: All images in the displayed sequence are deleted.
  • When images in a sequence are displayed in full-frame playback mode: The image currently displayed is deleted.

When Delete (665) of the playback menu is used, multiple images can be deleted or multiple images in the same sequence can be selected and deleted.

Editing Still Images

Before Editing Images

You can easily edit images on this camera. Edited copies are saved as separate files (103).

Edited copies are saved with the same shooting date and time as the original.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Before Editing Images - 1

Restrictions on Image Editing

  • Images taken using an aspect ratio of 16:9, 3:2 or 1:1 cannot be edited (except when using the black border editing function).
  • Editing other than RAW (NRW) processing cannot be performed on RAW (NRW) images.
    Edit a JPEG image created with RAW (NRW) processing.
    If you select images taken with an image quality of RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal, only the JPEG images will be edited.
  • Images that were extracted from a movie cannot be edited using the quick retouch or skin softening function.
  • When an edited copy is further modified with another editing function, check the following restrictions.
Editing function usedEditing functions to use
Quick retouchD-LightingThe skin softening, filter effects, small picture, black border, straighten, or crop function can be used.The quick retouch and D-Lighting functions cannot be used in combination.
Skin softeningFilter effectsStraightenRAW (NRW) processingOther editing functions can be used.
Small pictureAnother editing function cannot be used.When using in combination with other editing functions, use the small picture after the other editing functions have been applied.
Black border The small picture function can be used.
CropThe black border or straighten function can be used.Another editing function cannot be used if the image size is extremely small after the crop function is applied.

- Copies created with editing functions cannot be further edited with the same function used to create them.

Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and Saturation

Select an image (36) → MENU button (12) → Quick retouch

Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired effect level and press the ⓄK button.

  • The edited version is displayed on the right.
  • To exit without saving the copy, press ◀.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and Saturation - 1

text_image Quick retouch Normal + Amount

D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast

Select an image (☐36) → MENU button (☐12) → 📁 D-Lighting

Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired effect level and press the ⓄK button.

  • The edited version is displayed on the right.
  • To exit without saving the copy, press ◀.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast - 1

text_image D-Lighting Normal + Amount

Skin Softening: Softening Skin Tones

Select an image (☐36) → MENU button (☐12) → 📄 Skin softening

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired effect level and press the ⓄK button.

• To exit without saving the copy, press ◀.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired effect level and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image Skin softening Normal Amount

2 Preview the result and press the Ⓞ button.

• The edited face is zoomed in.
- When more than one face has been edited, press ◆ to switch the face that is displayed.
- To change the effect level, press the MENU button and return to step 1.
- An edited copy is created.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preview the result and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image Preview MEN Back OK SaveBack

Notes About Skin Softening

  • Up to 12 faces, in order of proximity to the center of the frame, can be enhanced.
  • Depending upon the direction in which faces are looking, or the brightness of faces, the camera may be unable to accurately detect faces, or the skin softening function may not perform as expected.
  • If no faces are detected, a warning is displayed and the screen returns to the playback menu.

Filter Effects: Applying Digital Filter Effects

Select an image (☐36) → MENU button (☐12) → 📋 Filter effects

Option Description
SoftGently softens the focus of the image from the center to the edge. In images taken with face detection (83) or pet detection (45) selected, areas around faces will be blurred.
Selective colorKeeps only a selected image color and makes other colors black-and-white.
Cross screenProduces star-like rays of light that radiate outward from bright objects such as sunlight reflections and city lights. Suitable for night scenes.
FisheyeCreates images that look like they were shot with a fisheye lens. Suitable for images shot in macro mode.
Miniature effectCreates images that look like close-up photos of a diorama. Suitable for images shot while looking down from a high location, with the main subject near the center of the frame.
Painting Creates images with the ambience of paintings.
VignetteCreates images by lowering the peripheral light intensity from the center to the edges of an image.

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired filter effect and press the ⓄK button.

- When Cross screen, Fisheye, Miniature effect, Painting or Vignette is selected, proceed to step 3.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired filter effect and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image Filter effects Soft Selective color Cross screen Fisheye Miniature effect Painting Vignette

2 Adjust the effect and press the ⓄK button.

  • Soft: Use ▲▼ to select the extent of the effect.
  • Selective color: Use ▲▼ to select the color to keep.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Adjust the effect and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image Soft Normal Extent

Soft

3 Preview the result and press the Ⓞ button.

• An edited copy is created.
• To exit without saving the copy, press ◀.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Preview the result and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image Preview Back OK Save Back

Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image

Select an image (36) → MENU button (12) → Small picture

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired copy size and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image - 1

text_image Small picture 640×480 320×240 160×120

2 Select Yes and press the ⓄK button.

- An edited copy is created (compression ratio of approximately 1:16).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image - 2

text_image Create small picture file? Yes No

BK Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Images

Select an image (☐36) → MENU button (☐12) → BK Black border

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired border thickness and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - BK Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Images - 1

text_image Black border Thin Medium Broad

2 Select Yes and press the Ⓞ button.

- An edited copy is created.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - BK Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Images - 2

text_image Create a copy with a black border? Yes No

Notes About Black Border

  • A portion of the image equivalent to the thickness of the black border is cut off because the black border overlaps the image.
  • When an image with a black border is printed using a printer's borderless print function, the black border may not be printed.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Black Border - 1

Straighten: Compensating for Image Slanting

Select an image (☐36) → MENU button (☐12) → ↗ Straighten

Use the multi selector to compensate for slanting and press the Ⓞ button.

  • Press ◀ to rotate counterclockwise by 1 degree.
  • Press ▶ to rotate clockwise by 1 degree.
    • To cancel, press the MENU button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Straighten: Compensating for Image Slanting - 1

text_image Straighten MENU Back Rotate

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Straighten: Compensating for Image Slanting - 2

Notes About Straighten

  • The larger the slant for which compensation is performed, the larger the area around the image that is cut.
  • Straighten can be performed up to 15 degrees.

NRWRAW (NRW) Processing: Creating JPEG Images from NRW Images

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → MENU button ( 12) → NRW RAW (NRW) processing

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - NRWRAW (NRW) Processing: Creating JPEG Images from NRW Images - 1

Use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ to select the image to be RAW processed and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - NRWRAW (NRW) Processing: Creating JPEG Images from NRW Images - 2

text_image RAW (NRW) processing MEN Back

2 Set the RAW (NRW) processing parameters.

- Apply the settings below while checking the image and moving the zoom control toward T (Q). Move toward T (Q) again to return to the setting screen.

  • White balance (35)
  • Exp. +/-
  • Picture Control (40)
  • Image quality (27)
  • Image size (29)
  • Distortion control (55)
  • D-Lighting (10)

  • Press the 📋 button to change back to the default settings.

  • Select EXE when all settings have been adjusted.

3 Select Yes and press the Ⓞ button.

• A JPEG image is created.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select Yes and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image RAW (NRW) processing EXE HND AUTO ±0 NORM ON CheckReset

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select Yes and press the Ⓞ button. - 2

text_image Create a JPEG copy at these settings? Yes No

Notes About RAW (NRW) Processing

  • This camera can only create JPEG-format copies of RAW (NRW) images taken with this camera.
  • The image is cropped if Image size is set to 3984×2656, ^16:9 3968×2232 or 1:13000×3000.
  • Preset manual of White balance can only be selected for images taken with White balance set to Preset manual.
  • The Noise reduction filter (54) that was set for shooting images is applied to the JPEG images to be created.

More Information

See "Printing Images of Size 1:1" (29) for more information.

1 Move the zoom control to enlarge the image (86).

2 Refine copy composition and press the MENU button.

  • Move the zoom control toward T (Q) or W (☐) to adjust the zoom ratio. Set a zoom ratio at which MENU is displayed.
  • Use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ to scroll the image so that only the portion to be copied is visible in the monitor.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - More Information - 1

natural_image Illustration of a person's face with a device labeled 'MENU:XX' and a control panel icon (no readable text or symbols beyond UI elements)

3 Select Yes and press the Ⓞ button.

- An edited copy is created.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - More Information - 2

text_image Save this image as displayed? Yes No

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - More Information - 3

Image Size

When the image size of the cropped copy is 320 × 240 or smaller, the image is displayed at a smaller size during playback.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Image Size - 1

Cropping the Image in Its Current "Tall" Orientation

Use the Rotate image option (66) to rotate the image so that it is displayed in landscape orientation. After cropping the image, rotate the cropped image back to "tall" orientation.

Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV)

1 Turn off the camera and connect it to the TV.

- Make sure that the plugs are properly oriented. Do not insert or remove the plugs at an angle when connecting or disconnecting them.

When using the optional audio video cable (104)
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Turn off the camera and connect it to the TV. - 1

text_image WhiteYellow Red VIDEO AUDIO L AUDIO R Computer

When using a commercially available HDMI cable
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Turn off the camera and connect it to the TV. - 2

text_image HDMI mini connector (Type C) to HDMI jack

2 Set the TV's input to external video input.

• See the documentation provided with your TV for details.

3 Hold down the ▶ button to turn on the camera.

- Images are displayed on the TV. - The camera monitor does not turn on.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Hold down the ▶ button to turn on the camera. - 1

text_image AE-L AE-L

If Images Are Not Displayed on the TV

Make sure that TV settings (86) in the setup menu conforms to the standard used by your TV.

Using a TV Remote Control (HDMI Device Control)

The remote control of an HDMI-CEC-compatible TV can be used to select images, start and pause movie playback, switch between full-screen playback mode and four-image thumbnail display, etc.

  • Set HDMI device control (86) of TV settings to On (default setting) in the setup menu, and then connect the camera and TV using an HDMI cable.
  • Aim the remote control at the TV when operating it.

Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)

Users of PictBridge-compatible printers can connect the camera directly to the printer and print images without using a computer.

Connecting the Camera to a Printer

1 Turn off the camera.
2 Turn on the printer.

- Check printer settings.

3 Connect the camera to the printer using the included USB cable.

- Make sure that the plugs are properly oriented. Do not insert or remove the plugs at an angle when connecting or disconnecting them.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Connecting the Camera to a Printer - 1

text_image Diagram showing a DSLR camera connected to a printer via cable, with an inset illustrating the internal structure of a device.

4 The camera is automatically turned on.

- The PictBridge startup screen (①) is displayed in the camera monitor, followed by the Print selection screen (②).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The camera is automatically turned on. - 1

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The camera is automatically turned on. - 2

More Information

See "Printing Images of Size 1:1" (29) for more information.

Printing Individual Images

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ to select the desired image and press the ⓄK button.

- Move the zoom control toward W (☐) to switch to thumbnail playback or T (Q) to switch to full-frame playback.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Printing Individual Images - 1

text_image Print selection 15/11 2013 NO. 32 [ 32 ] MENU : 20EN

2 Use ▲▼ to select Copies and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Printing Individual Images - 2

text_image PictBridge 1 prints Start print Copies Paper size

3 Select the desired number of copies (up to 9) and press the Ⓞ button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Printing Individual Images - 3

text_image Copies 1

4 Select Paper size and press the Ⓞ button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select Paper size and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image PictBridge 4 prints Start print Copies Paper size

5 Select the desired paper size and press the Ⓞ button.

  • To apply the paper size setting configured on the printer, select Default as the paper size option.
  • The paper size options available on the camera vary depending on the printer that you use.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the desired paper size and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image Paper size Default 3.5×5 in. 5×7 in. 100×150 mm 4×6 in. 8×10 in. Letter

6 Select Start print and press the Ⓞ button.

  • Printing starts.
  • To cancel printing, press the OK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select Start print and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image PictBridge 4 prints Start print Copies Paper size

Printing Multiple Images

1 When the Print selection screen is displayed, press the MENU button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - When the Print selection screen is displayed, press the MENU button. - 1

text_image Print selection 15/11 2013 NO. 32 [ 32 ]

2 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Paper size and press the ⓄK button.

- To exit the print menu, press the MENU button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Paper size and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image PictBridge 4 prints Start print Copies Paper size

3 Select the desired paper size and press the Ⓞ button.

  • To apply the paper size setting configured on the printer, select Default as the paper size option.
  • The paper size options available on the camera vary depending on the printer that you use.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the desired paper size and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image Paper size Default 3.5×5 in. 5×7 in. 100×150 mm 4×6 in. 8×10 in. Letter

4 Select Print selection, Print all images, or DPOF printing and press the Ⓞ button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select Print selection, Print all images, or DPOF printing and press the Ⓞ button. - 1

text_image Print menu Print selection Print all images DPOF printing Paper size

Select images (up to 99) and the number of copies (up to 9) of each.

  • Use the multi selector ◀▶ to select images, and use ▲▼ to specify the number of copies to be printed.
  • Images selected for printing are indicated by the check mark icon and the numeral indicating the

number of copies to be printed. If no copies have been specified for images, the selection is canceled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Print selection - 1

text_image Print selection MENU Back
  • Move the zoom control toward T (Q) to switch to full-frame playback or W (☐) to switch to thumbnail playback.
  • Press the OK button when setting is complete.
  • When the screen shown on the right is displayed, select Start print and press the OK button to start printing.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Print selection - 2

text_image Print selection 10 prints Start print Cancel

One copy each of all images saved in the internal memory, or on the memory card, is printed.

- When the screen shown on the right is displayed, select Start print and press the OK button to start printing.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Print all images - 1

text_image Print all images 18 prints Start print Cancel

DPOF printing

Print images for which a print order was created using the Print order option (62).

- When the screen shown on the right is displayed, select Start print and press the OK button to start printing.

To view the current print order, select View images and press the

OK button. To print images, press the OK button again.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - DPOF printing - 1

text_image DPOF printing 10 prints Start print View images Cancel

Editing Movies

Extracting Only the Desired Portion of a Movie

The desired portion of a recorded movie can be saved as a separate file.

1 Play back the desired movie and pause at the start point of the portion that is to be extracted (98).

2 Use the multi selector ◀▶ to select the ✕ control, and then press the Ⓞ button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Extracting Only the Desired Portion of a Movie - 1

text_image [ 7m42s ]

3 Use ▲▼ to select the ⚙ control (Choose start point).

  • Use the multi selector ◀▶ or rotate it to move the start point.
  • To cancel editing, select ▶ (Back), and press the OK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Extracting Only the Desired Portion of a Movie - 2

text_image Choose start point 8m48s

4 Use ▲▼ to select ≈ (Choose end point).

  • Use the multi selector ◀▶ or rotate it to move the end point.
  • To preview the specified portion, use ▲▼ to select ▶ and then press the ⓄK button. Press the ⓄK button again to stop previewing.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Extracting Only the Desired Portion of a Movie - 3

text_image Choose end point 5m52s

5 Use ▲▼ to select [◀] (Save) and press the ⓄK button.

- Follow the instructions on the screen to save the movie.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Extracting Only the Desired Portion of a Movie - 4

text_image Save 5m52s

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Extracting Only the Desired Portion of a Movie - 5

Notes About Movie Editing

  • Use a sufficiently charged battery to prevent the camera from turning off during editing. When the battery level indicator is 📄, movie editing is not possible.
  • A movie that was created by editing cannot be trimmed again.
  • The actual trimmed portion of a movie may differ slightly from the portion selected using the start and end points.
    • Movies cannot be trimmed so that they are less than two seconds long.

Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Image

The desired frame of a recorded movie can be extracted and saved as a still image.

  • Pause a movie and display the frame to be extracted (98).
  • Use the multi selector ◀ to select the control and press the OK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Image - 1

text_image 7m42s
  • Select Yes when a confirmation dialog is displayed, and press the OK button to save the image.
  • The still image is saved with Normal as the image quality. The image size is determined by the type (image size) (30) of the original movie.

For example, a still image saved from a movie

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Image - 2

text_image Copy this frame as a still image? Yes No

recorded with 1080p★ 1080★/30p (or 1080p★ 1080★/25p) is 169 (1920 × 1080 pixels).

The Quick Menu

QUAL Image Quality and Image Size

Display the still image shooting screen → 🔒 button → QUAL (Image quality/Image size) tab (☐70)

Set the image quality (compression ratio) and image size (number of pixels) used when saving images.

Available Image Quality

Lower compression ratios result in higher quality images, but the number of images that can be saved is reduced.

OptionDescription
FINE FineFine image quality than Normal. File format: JPEG, compression ratio of about 1:4
NORMNormal (default setting)Normal image quality, suitable for most applications. File format: JPEG, compression ratio of about 1:8
NRW+ FINERAW (NRW) + FineTwo images are recorded at the same time: one RAW (NRW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NRW+ NORMRAW (NRW) + NormalTwo images are recorded at the same time: one RAW (NRW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NRWRAW (NRW)Raw data from the image sensor are saved. Create JPEG image files after shooting using RAW (NRW) processing (15) in the playback menu. · When RAW (NRW) is selected, Image size is reset to 4000×3000. File format: RAW (NRW), Nikon's own format

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Available Image Quality - 1

RAW (NRW) Images of This Camera

  • To print or edit RAW (NRW) images, use JPEG images created from the RAW (NRW) images using RAW (NRW) processing (15). RAW (NRW) images cannot be printed or edited.
  • ViewNX 2 (104) needs to be installed on the computer to be able to view RAW (NRW) images on the computer. Capture NX 2 is also compatible with RAW (NRW) images.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - RAW (NRW) Images of This Camera - 1

Image Quality Setting

  • The image quality can be set in any shooting mode. The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except U1, U2 and U3 shooting modes and Easy panorama scene mode).
  • RAW (NRW) images cannot be recorded in the following shooting modes.

- Scene mode

- Special effects mode (except Zoom exposure and Defocus during exposure) If you change the shooting mode to either of the above shooting modes when a RAW (NRW) image quality has been selected, the image quality will change to Fine or Normal.

  • Digital zoom cannot be used when Image quality is set to RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Image Quality Setting - 1

Recording of RAW (NRW) and JPEG Images at the Same Time

  • The RAW (NRW) image and the JPEG image that are recorded at the same time have the same file number but with their own file extensions, ".NRW" and ".JPG" (103).
  • When playing back on the camera, only the JPEG image is displayed.
  • Note that when the JPEG image is deleted by pressing the 📋 button, the RAW (NRW) image that was recorded at the same time is also deleted.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Recording of RAW (NRW) and JPEG Images at the Same Time - 1

Number of Images That Can Be Saved

  • The approximate number of images that can be saved can be checked in the monitor when shooting (26).
  • Note that due to JPEG compression, the number of images that can be saved may vary greatly depending on the image content, even when using memory cards with the same capacity and the same image quality and image size settings. In addition, the number of images that can be saved may vary depending on the make of the memory card.
  • If the number of exposures remaining is 10,000 or more, the number of exposures remaining display shows "9999".

Available Image Size

Set the image size (number of pixels) used when saving JPEG images. The larger the image size, the larger the size at which it can be printed, but the number of images that can be saved is reduced.

Option Aspect ratio (horizontal to vertical)
^12M 4000×3000 (default setting)4:3
^8M 3264×24484:3
^4M 2272×17044:3
^2M 1600×12004:3
^VGA 640×4804:3
^3-2 3984×26563:2
^16-9 3968×223216:9
^1:1 3000×30001:1

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Available Image Size - 1

Image Size Setting

- The image size can be set in any shooting mode. The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except U1, U2 and U3 shooting modes and Easy panorama scene mode).

- The size of JPEG images can be selected when you create JPEG images from RAW (NRW) images using RAW (NRW) processing (15) (up to a maximum of 4000 × 3000 pixels).

- Image size for the JPEG image can be set when RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal is selected. However, note that 3984×2656, 16:9 9M 3968×2232 and [1:1] 3000×3000 cannot be selected.

- The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Image Size Setting - 1

Printing Images of Size 1:1

Change the printer setting to "Border" when printing images with the size set to 1:1. The images may not be printed in 1:1 ratio depending on the printer.

QUAL Movie Options

Rotate the mode dial to ▶ or ▶ CSM → 📋 button → QUAL (Movie options) tab (70)

Select the desired movie option to record.

Select normal speed movie options to record at normal speed, or HS movie options (31) to record in slow or fast motion.

- Memory cards (Class 6 or higher) are recommended for recording movies (25).

Normal Speed Movie Options

Option (Image size/Frame rate, File format)*Image sizeAspect ratio(horizontal to vertical)
1080*301080*251080★/30p1080★/25p(default setting)1920 × 1080(High)16:9
1080*301080*251080/30p1080/25p1920 × 1080 16:9
720*30720*25720/30p720/25p1280 × 720 16:9
480*30480*25480/30p480/25p640 × 480 4:3

* The items and frame rate that can be set vary depending on the settings of Video mode in the TV settings (86) setup menu. The frame rate can be set to about 30 fps for NTSC, and about 25 fps for PAL.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - QUAL Movie Options - 1

Notes About Movie Custom Setting Mode

480p 480/30p (or 480p 25 480/25p) of normal speed movies and HS movies cannot be selected.

HS Movie Options (▶■ (Movie) Mode Only)

Recorded movies are played back in fast or slow motion.

See "Playing Back in Slow Motion and Fast Motion" (32) for more information.

OptionImage sizeAspect ratio(horizontal to vertical)Description
480/20480/100HS 480/4×640 × 4804:31/4-speed slow motion movies• Max. recording time:7 minutes 15 seconds( playback time: 29 minutes)
720/60720/50HS 720/2×1280 × 72016:91/2-speed slow motion movies• Max. recording time:14 minutes 30 seconds( playback time: 29 minutes)
1080/151080/25HS 1080/0.5×1920 × 108016:92× speed fast motion movies• Max. recording time:29 minutes ( playback time:14 minutes 30 seconds)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - HS Movie Options (▶■ (Movie) Mode Only) - 1

Notes About HS Movie

• Sound is not recorded.
- Zoom position, focus, exposure, and white balance are locked when movie recording starts.
- Some Movie options settings are not available when using certain special effects.

Playing Back in Slow Motion and Fast Motion When recording at normal speed:

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Playing Back in Slow Motion and Fast Motion When recording at normal speed: - 1

text_image Recording time 10 s Playback time 10 s

When recording at 480/120/480/100 HS 480/4×:

Movies are recorded at 4× normal speed.

They are played back in slow motion at 4× slower speed.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - When recording at 480/120/480/100 HS 480/4×: - 1

line | Time Type | Duration (s) | | ----------------- | ------------ | | Recording time | 10 | | Playback time | 40 |

When recording at 1080/15/1080/25 HS 1080/0.5×:

Movies are recorded at 1/2 normal speed.

They are played back in fast motion at 2× faster speed.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - When recording at 1080/15/1080/25 HS 1080/0.5×: - 1

text_image Recording time 10 s Playback time 5 s Fast motion playback

ISO ISO Sensitivity

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2, U3 or ▶ CSM → 🔒 button → ISO (ISO sensitivity) tab (70)

Higher ISO sensitivity allows darker subjects to be captured. Additionally, even with subjects of similar brightness, images can be taken at faster shutter speeds, and blurring caused by camera shake and subject movement can be reduced.

- When higher ISO sensitivity is set, images may contain noise.

Option Description
ISO sensitivity• A u t o (default setting):ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted within a range from ISO 80 to 1600.• ISO 200 ISO 80-200, ISO 400 ISO 80-400, ISO 800 ISO 80-800 (fixed range auto):Restrict the range in which the camera automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity.• 80 to 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400):ISO sensitivity is fixed at the specified value.
Minimum shutter speedSet the shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to be automatically adjusted, when the shooting mode is P or A. If the exposure is insufficient with the shutter speed that is set here, the ISO sensitivity is increased automatically to obtain the correct exposure.• The setting is enabled when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto, ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800.• If the exposure is still insufficient even after ISO sensitivity is increased, the shutter speed slows down.• Default setting: None

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - ISO ISO Sensitivity - 1

ISO Sensitivity Display on the Shooting Screen

  • When Auto is selected, ISO is displayed if the ISO sensitivity automatically increases.
  • When ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800 is selected, the maximum value for ISO sensitivity is displayed.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - ISO Sensitivity Display on the Shooting Screen - 1

Notes About ISO Sensitivity

  • In M (manual) mode, when set to Auto, ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800, the ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About ISO Sensitivity - 1

Notes About ISO Sensitivity Settings in ▶CSM (Movie Custom Setting) Mode

  • When Shooting mode (6-70) of the movie custom setting menu is set to Special effects, ISO sensitivity cannot be set.
  • ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400, ISO 80-800, Hi 1 and Minimum shutter speed cannot be selected.
  • When Shooting mode is set to Aperture-priority auto with ISO sensitivity set to Auto, ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted within a range from ISO 80 to 3200. When Shooting mode is set to Manual, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.

WB White Balance (Adjusting Hue)

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2, U3, ▶ or ▶ CSM → button → WB (White balance) tab (70)

Adjust white balance to suit the light source or weather conditions in order to make the colors in images match what you see with your eyes.

- Use Auto (normal) under most conditions. Change the setting when you want to adjust the hue of the image you are taking.

OptionDescription
AUTO1Auto (normal)(default setting)White balance is automatically adjusted to suit lighting conditions.When set to Auto (warm lighting), the images are preserved with warm colors if they are shot under an incandescent light source. When using the flash, white balance is adjusted according to the flash lighting condition.
AUTO2Auto (warm lighting)
DaylightWhite balance is adjusted for direct sunlight.
Incandescent Use under incandescent lighting.
◆1Fluorescent FL1Select one of Fluorescent FL1 (white fluorescent), Fluorescent FL2 (daylight white/neutral fluorescent) and Fluorescent FL3 (daylight fluorescent).
◆2Fluorescent FL2
◆3Fluorescent FL3
◆Cloudy Use when taking images under overcast skies.
◆Flash Use with the flash.
KChoose color temp.Use to directly specify color temperature (○○36).• Select K Choose color temp. of White balance in the first line, and then select the value of Choose color temp. in the second line.
PRE1Preset manual 1Use when the desired result is not achieved with Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting), Incandescent, etc. (○○37).
PRE2Preset manual 2
PRE3Preset manual 3

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - WB White Balance (Adjusting Hue) - 1

Notes About White Balance

  • Lower the flash when white balance is set to any setting other than Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting) or Flash (59).
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About White Balance - 1

Fine Adjustment of White Balance

To perform fine adjustment of white balance, select Fine-tune and press the OK button.

Use the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ to configure settings.

  • "A" represents amber, "B" blue, "G" green, and "M" magenta.
  • Press the 📋 button to reset.
  • Rotate the sub-command dial to return to the previous screen.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Fine Adjustment of White Balance - 1

text_image Fine-tune A-B D G-M Q ResetBack

The color displayed in the fine-tune screen represents the approximate color in the color temperature direction. A fine-tuned color may not be exactly the same as that in the image. For example, when the white balance is set to Incandescent, the image will not have a strong blue color even if fine adjustment is performed in the B (blue) direction.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Fine Adjustment of White Balance - 2

Color Temperature

Color temperature is an objective measure of colors of light sources which are expressed in the unit of absolute temperature (K: Kelvin). Light sources with lower color temperatures appear more reddish, while light sources with higher color temperatures appear more bluish.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Color Temperature - 1

line | Time Interval | Color | | ------------- | ----- | | 3000 | Red | | 4000 | Blue | | 5000 | Blue | | 6000 | Blue | | 8000 | Blue | | 10000 | Blue |

① Sodium-vapor lamps: 2700K
② Incandescent/ Warm-white fluorescent: 3000K
③ White fluorescent: 3700K
④ Cool-white fluorescent: 4200K
⑤ Day white fluorescent: 5000K
⑥ Direct sunlight: 5200K

⑦ Flash: 5400K
⑧ Cloudy: 6000K
⑨ Daylight fluorescent: 6500K
⑩ High temp. mercury-vapor: 7200K
⑪ Shade: 8000K

Using Preset Manual

Use the procedure below to measure the white balance value under the lighting used during shooting.

- Up to 3 measured values can be saved: PRE1, PRE2 and PRE3.

1 Place a white or gray reference object under the lighting that will be used during shooting.

2 Use the multi selector ◀ to select PRE1, PRE2 or PRE3.

- Items can also be selected by rotating the main command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using Preset Manual - 1

text_image FINE AUTO AUTO OFF White balance PRE1 Preset manual Fine-tune Preset manual 1 PRE1 PRE2 PRE3

3 Use ▼ to select Preset manual and ◀▶ to select PRE.

  • The lens extends to the zoom position for measurement.
    • To apply the last measured value, select ✗.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using Preset Manual - 2

text_image FNE BY AUTO PRE1 OFF White balance Preset manual Fine-tune Cancel × PRE

4 Frame the white or gray reference object in the measuring window, and press the OK button to measure the value.

- The shutter is released and measurement is complete. No image is saved.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using Preset Manual - 3

text_image FINE AUTO PRE OFF PRE1 Measure × PRE

Measuring window

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using Preset Manual - 4

Notes About Preset Manual

A value for flash lighting cannot be measured with Preset manual. When shooting using the flash, set White balance to Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting) or Flash.

BKT Auto Bracketing (Continuous Shooting While Changing the Exposure and White Balance)

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → 🔒 button → BKT (Auto bracketing) tab (70)

Continuous shooting can be performed while changing the exposure (brightness) automatically with the shutter speed (Tv), the aperture value (Av) or ISO sensitivity (Sv), or multiple images can be recorded while varying the white balance (WB). This is effective when adjusting the brightness of an image is difficult, or when multiple light sources are mixed together and it is difficult to decide the white balance.

1 Use the multi selector ◀▶ to select the desired type of bracketing (○39), and press ▼.

- Items can also be selected by rotating the main command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector ◀▶ to select the desired type of bracketing (○39), and press ▼. - 1

text_image Auto bracketing Number of shots Increment Range Reset

2 Select the number of images to shoot and press ▼.

• 3 or 5 images can be selected.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the number of images to shoot and press ▼. - 1

text_image Auto bracketing Number of shots 3 Increment 0.3 Range Reset 3 5

3 Select the desired step increment of compensation.

- For WB (white balance bracketing), select Range and set the bracketing range.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the desired step increment of compensation. - 1

text_image Auto bracketing Number of shots Increment 0.3 Range Reset 0.3 0.7 1.0

4 Press the 🔒 button or the ⓄK button.

• The monitor display returns to the shooting screen.
- To change the values to the default setting, select Reset and press the OK button.

OptionDescription
OFFOFF (default setting)Bracketing is not performed.
TvExposure bracketing (Tv)When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, images are captured continuously while the shutter speed is changed automatically.• “Tv” stands for “Time value.”
AvExposure bracketing (Av)When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, images are captured continuously while the aperture value is changed automatically.• “Av” stands for “Aperture value.”
SvExposure bracketing (Sv)When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, images are captured continuously while changing the ISO sensitivity, with the shutter speed and aperture value fixed.• “Sv” stands for “Sensitivity value.”
WBWhite balance bracketingWhen the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, one image is captured, and the set number of images are recorded with the color temperature changed for each one.

Various types of bracketing can be set depending on the shooting mode.

Shooting modeExposure bracketing (Tv)Exposure bracketing (Av)Exposure bracketing (Sv)White balance bracketing
P (Programmed auto)--
S (Shutter-priority auto)--
A (Aperture-priority auto)--
M (Manual) √- √√

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the 🔒 button or the ⓄK button. - 1

Notes About Auto Bracketing

  • When exposure compensation (69) is set with AE Bracketing (Tv), AE Bracketing (Av) or AE Bracketing (Sv) simultaneously, a combined exposure compensation is applied. The new exposure compensation value updates the reference point to be displayed in the indicator.
  • In White balance bracketing, only compensation for the color temperature (horizontal direction from A (amber) to B (blue)) is performed. Compensation in the vertical direction from G (green) to M (magenta) is not performed.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control) (Changing the Settings for Image Recording)

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2, U3 or CSM → button → tab (70)

Change the settings for image recording according to the shooting scene or your preferences. Sharpness, contrast and saturation can be adjusted in detail.

OptionDescription
Standard (default setting)Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most situations.
NeutralMinimal processing for natural results. Select for images that will later be extensively processed or retouched.
VividImages are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Select for images that emphasize primary colors, such as blue, red, and green.
MonochromeShoots monochrome photographs such as in black-and-white or sepia.
Custom 1 *Changes to the setting of Custom 1 in COOLPIX Custom Picture Control.
Custom 2 *Changes to the setting of Custom 2 in COOLPIX Custom Picture Control.

* Only displayed when the setting customized in Custom Picture Control (44) has been registered.

COOLPIX Picture Control

  • The COOLPIX Picture Control function of this camera cannot be used with other makes of cameras, Capture NX, Capture NX 2 and ViewNX 2 Picture Control function.
  • In CSM (movie custom setting) mode, Picture Control cannot be selected when Shooting mode (70) of the movie custom setting menu is set to Special effects.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

Customizing Existing COOLPIX Picture Controls: Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust

COOLPIX Picture Control can be customized using Quick adjust, which allows for balanced adjustment of sharpness, contrast, saturation and other image editing components, or manual adjust, which allows for detailed adjustment of the components individually.

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the desired type of COOLPIX Picture Control and press the Ⓞ button.

- Items can also be selected by rotating the main command dial.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Customizing Existing COOLPIX Picture Controls: Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust - 1

text_image Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome View grid

2 Use ▲▼ to highlight the desired setting (○○42) and use ◀▶ to select a value.

  • Press the OK button to set the value.
  • When COOLPIX Picture Controls are modified from the default settings, an asterisk (*) is displayed after the options in the Picture Control setting menu.

- To change the values to the default setting, select Reset and press the OK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Customizing Existing COOLPIX Picture Controls: Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust - 2

text_image Standard Quick adjust Image sharpening Contrast Saturation Reset MENU Back

View Grid of COOLPIX Picture Control

When the zoom control is moved toward T (Q) on the screen shown in step 1, the current and default settings are displayed on a square grid so that you can see their relations with the other COOLPIX Picture Controls.

The vertical axis indicates the level of contrast, and the horizontal axis indicates the level of saturation. To return to the setting screen, move the zoom control toward T(Q) again.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Customizing Existing COOLPIX Picture Controls: Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust - 3

text_image Standard CONTFAST S: SD* N: NL Y: VI M: NC I: CT T Back SATURATION
  • Rotate the multi selector to change to other COOLPIX Picture Controls.
  • Press the OK button to display the COOLPIX Picture Control setting screen (step 2 above).
  • For Monochrome, the grid is displayed for contrast only.
  • The grid is also displayed when adjusting Contrast or Saturation with manual adjustment.

Types of Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust

Option Description
Quick adjust1Adjusts the sharpness, contrast and saturation levels automatically.Setting to the – side reduces the effect of the selected COOLPIX Picture Control, and setting to the + side emphasizes its effect.·Default setting:0
Image sharpeningControls how much outlines are sharpened during shooting. The higher the number, the sharper the image, and the lower the number, the softer the image.SelectA(auto) for automatic adjustment.·Default setting:3 forStandardorMonochrome,2forNeutraland4for Vivid
ContrastControls the contrast.Setting to the – side gives the image a softer appearance, and setting to the + side gives it a harder appearance. Select lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast subjects.SelectA(auto) for automatic adjustment.·Default setting:0
Saturation2Controls the vividness of colors.Setting to the – side reduces the vividness, and setting to the + side increases the vividness.SelectA(auto) for automatic adjustment.·Default setting:0
Filter effects3Simulates the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.·OFF:Filter effects are not used.·Y(yellow),O(orange),R(red):Enhance contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in landscape photographs. The contrast is strengthened in the order Y→O→R.·G(green):Softens skin tones. Suitable for portraits.·Default setting:OFF
Toning3Controls the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, and Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome).Pressing the multi selector ▼ when Sepia or Cyanotype is selected enables you to select a saturation level. Press ◀▶ to adjust the saturation.Default setting: B&W (black-and-white)

1 Quick adjust is not available in Neutral, Monochrome, Custom 1 and Custom 2. The values set manually are disabled if quick adjust is used after manual setting.
^2 Not displayed for Monochrome.
^3 Only displayed for Monochrome.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Types of Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust - 1

Notes About Image Sharpening

  • The effects of Image sharpening cannot be previewed in the monitor during shooting. Check the results in playback mode.
  • In ▶CSM (movie custom setting) mode, the image sharpening effect is fixed at A (auto).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Image Sharpening - 1

Contrast, Saturation and A (Auto)

  • Results for contrast and saturation vary with the exposure, and the position and size of the subject in the frame.
  • The setting for the COOLPIX Picture Control which has A (auto) selected for either Contrast or Saturation is displayed in green in the COOLPIX Picture Control grid.

The Shooting Menu (P, S, A or M Mode)

Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control)

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Custom Picture Control

Customize the settings of COOLPIX Picture Control (41) and register them in Custom 1 or Custom 2 of Picture Control in the quick menu.

Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Edit and save, and press the ⓄK button.

- Select Delete to delete a registered Custom Picture Control.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls - 1

text_image Custom Picture Control Edit and save Delete

2 Select the original COOLPIX Picture Control (6-41) to be edited, and press the ⓄK button.
3 Use ▲▼ to highlight the desired setting and use ◀▶ to select a value (○○41).

  • The options are the same as those for adjusting the COOLPIX Picture Control.
  • Press the OK button when you finish adjustment.
  • To change the values to the default setting, select Reset and press the ⓄK button.

4 Select the registration destination and press the ⓄK button.

  • Custom 1 or Custom 2 becomes selectable in Picture Control of the quick menu.
  • To change the adjusted values, select Custom 1 or Custom 2 in Picture Control or Custom Picture Control.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls - 2

text_image Save as Custom 1 Custom 2

Metering

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Metering

The process of measuring the brightness of the subject to determine the exposure is known as "metering."

Use this option to set the method of how the camera meters exposure.

Option Description
Matrix1(default setting)The camera uses a wide area of the screen for metering. Recommended for typical shooting.
Center-weightedThe camera meters the entire frame but assigns greatest weight to the subject in the center of the frame. The classic metering for portraits; it preserves background details while letting lighting conditions in the center of the frame determine exposure.2
Spot1The camera meters the area shown by the circle in the center of the frame. This can be used when the subject is much lighter or darker than the background. Ensure that the subject is within the area shown by the circle when shooting.2

When Focus-coupled metering is set to On and AF area mode (6-49) is set to Manual, the brightness of the subject is measured by giving higher priority to the focus area. See "Focus-coupled Metering" (6-58) for more information.

^2 Can be used with focus lock (☐85) to meter off-center subjects.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Metering - 1

Notes About Metering

  • When digital zoom is in effect, Center-weighted or Spot is selected depending on the magnification of an enlargement.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Metering - 1

Display on the Shooting Screen

  • When Center-weighted or Spot is selected, the metering range guide (16) is displayed (except when digital zoom is used).
  • When Focus-coupled metering is set to On, the metering range guide for Spot is not displayed.

Continuous Shooting

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Continuous

Option Description
Single (default setting)One image is shot each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
Continuous HWhile the shutter-release button is held all the way down, images are captured continuously.The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 8 fps and the maximum number of continuous shots is about 6 (when image quality is set to 12M and image size is set to 4000×3000 ).
Continuous MWhile the shutter-release button is held all the way down, images are captured continuously.The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 4 fps and the maximum number of continuous shots is about 6 (when image quality is set to and image size is set to 4000×3000 ).
Continuous LWhile the shutter-release button is held all the way down, images are captured continuously.The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 1 fps and the maximum number of continuous shots is about 30 (when image quality is set to and image size is set to 4000×3000 ).
BSS BSS (Best Shot Selector)While the shutter-release button is held all the way down, the camera captures a series of up to 10 images and automatically saves the sharpest image.Use when shooting a stationary subject in a place where flash photography is prohibited and camera shake is likely to occur.
Multi-shot 16Each time the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, the camera captures a series of 16 images and saves it as a single image.The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 30 fps.Image quality is set to and image size is fixed at 5M ( 2560×1920 pixels).Digital zoom is not available.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Continuous Shooting - 1
Option Description
120Continuous H: 120 fpsEach time the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, images are captured at a high speed rate.The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 120 fps and the maximum number of continuous shots is 60.Image size is fixed at ^1m (1280 × 960 pixels).
60Continuous H: 60 fpsEach time the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, images are captured at a high speed rate.The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 60 fps and the maximum number of continuous shots is 60.Image size is fixed at ^1m (1280 × 960 pixels).
Intvl timer shootingThe camera shoots still images automatically at the specified interval (47).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Continuous Shooting - 2

Notes About Continuous Shooting

  • Focus, exposure and white balance are fixed at the values determined with the first shot in each series.
  • It may take some time to save the images after shooting.
  • When ISO sensitivity increases, noise may appear in captured images.
  • The frame rate may become slower depending on the image quality, image size, memory card type or shooting conditions (such as when recording RAW images).
  • When using Multi-shot 16, Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps, banding or variance in brightness or hue may occur in images that were captured under lighting that flashes quickly at high speeds, such as fluorescent, mercury-vapor, or sodium-vapor lighting.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

Interval Timer Shooting

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Continuous

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Ⓤ Intvl timer shooting, and then press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Interval Timer Shooting - 1

text_image Continuous 60 Continuous H: 60 fps Intvl timer shooting 30s

2 Select the desired interval between each shot and press the ⓄK button.

- The maximum number of images that can be taken during interval timer shooting differs according to the selected interval.

  • 30 s: 600 images
  • 1 min: 300 images
  • 5 min: 60 images
  • 10 min: 30 images

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select the desired interval between each shot and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image Intvl timer shooting 30s 30 s 1n 1 min 5n 5 min 10m 10 min

3 Press the MENU button to display the shooting screen.

4 Press the shutter-release button all the way to shoot the first image.

  • The shutter is automatically released at the specified interval to shoot subsequent images.
  • The monitor turns off and the power-on lamp flashes during the intervals between shots (when the battery is used).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button all the way to shoot the first image. - 1

text_image P QUAL @10s [ ] 17250F5.F5.6 [800]

5 When the desired number of images have been taken, press the shutter-release button.

  • Shooting ends.
  • Shooting ends automatically when the number of shot images reaches the upper limit, or if the internal memory or memory card becomes full.

Notes About Interval Timer Shooting

  • To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly during shooting, use a fully charged battery.
  • If the AC Adapter EH-5b and the Power Connector EP-5A (available separately) (104) are used, this camera can be powered from an electrical outlet. Do not, under any circumstances, use an AC adapter other than the EH-5b or a power connector other than the EP-5A. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating or damage to the camera.
  • Do not rotate the mode dial to a different setting while performing interval timer shooting.

AF Area Mode

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2, U3 or EFFECTS → MENU button → P, S, A, M or 📋 tab (☐13) → AF area mode

Change the method of how the camera selects the focus area for autofocus.

  • The AF area mode can also be selected by pressing the multi selector ▶ ([+])(☐58, ⚙88).
  • In P, S, A or M mode, the default setting is Center (normal).
    • In EFFECTS mode, the default setting is Auto.
Option Description
Face priorityWhen the camera detects a human face, it focuses on that face. See “Using Face Detection” (83) for more information.When framing a composition with no human subjects or detected faces, AF area mode operates in the same way as when set to Auto.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Area Mode - 1
AutoThe camera automatically selects one or more of the 9 focus areas containing the subject closest to the camera when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Area Mode - 2

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Area Mode - 3

Option Description
ManualUse the multi selector ▲▼◀▶ or rotate it to move the focus area to where you want to focus. • To use the multi selector to configure the flash mode or other settings, press the ⓄK button. To return to moving the focus area, press the ⓄK button again. • At an Image size setting (♂29) of 1:1 3000×3000, 81 focus areas are available. • When Metering (♂45) is set to Matrix, the camera meters by assigning greatest weight to the focus area.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Area Mode - 4 Scope of movable focus area
Center (normal) Center (wide)The camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame. Either the normal or wide size can be selected for the focus area.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Area Mode - 5 Focus area
Subject tracking*Use this function to take images of moving subjects. Register the subject on which the camera focuses. The focus area automatically moves to track the subject. See "Using Subject Tracking" (♂51) for more information.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Area Mode - 6
Target finding AF*When the camera detects the main subject, it focuses on that subject.See "Using the Target Finding AF" (82).NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Area Mode - 7Focus areas

* Not available in special effects mode.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Area Mode - 8

Notes About AF Area Mode

  • When digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame regardless of the AF area mode setting.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

Using Subject Tracking

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → AF area mode

1

Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select ☐Subject tracking, and press the Ⓞ button.

  • Press the MENU button after changing the settings and return to the shooting screen.
  • The AF area mode can also be selected by pressing the multi selector ▶ ([H]).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - 1 - 1

text_image AF area mode Face priority Auto Manual Center (normal) Center (wide) Subject tracking Target finding AF

2 Register a subject.

  • Align the subject that you want to track with the border in the center of the monitor and press the OK button.
  • When the subject is registered, a yellow border (focus area) is displayed around that subject and the camera begins tracking that subject.
  • If the subject cannot be registered, the border glows red. Change the composition and try registering the subject again.
  • To cancel subject registration, press the OK button.
  • If the camera can no longer track the registered subject, the focus area disappears. Register the subject again.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Register a subject. - 1

text_image P OK Start 1/250 F5.65.6 1290

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Register a subject. - 2

text_image P QUAL NR 1/250 F5.65.6 NFX12+ 1290 J

3 Press the shutter-release button fully to take the picture.

- If the shutter-release button is pressed while the focus area is not displayed, the camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the shutter-release button fully to take the picture. - 1

natural_image Simple grayscale icon of a person with a square frame, no text or symbols present

Notes About Subject Tracking

  • If you perform operations such as zooming while the camera is tracking the subject, the registration is canceled.
  • Subject tracking may not be possible in certain shooting conditions.

Autofocus Mode

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Autofocus mode

Select how the camera focuses when shooting still images.

Option Description
AF-S Single AF (default setting)The camera focuses only when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
AF-FFull-time AFThe camera continues focusing even when the shutter-release button is not pressed halfway. The sound of lens drive movement is heard while the camera focuses.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Autofocus Mode - 1

Notes About Autofocus Mode

The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Autofocus Mode - 1

Autofocus Mode for Movie Recording

Autofocus mode for movie recording can be set with Autofocus mode (6-71) in the movie menu or movie custom setting menu.

Flash Exp. Comp.

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Flash exp. comp.

Adjust the flash output.

Use this option when the flash is too bright or too dark.

Option Description
+0.3 to +2.0The flash output is increased from +0.3 to +2.0 EV, in increments of 1/3 EV, to make the main subject of the frame appear brighter.
0.0 (default setting)The flash output is not adjusted.
-0.3 to -2.0The flash output is reduced from -0.3 to -2.0 EV, in increments of 1/3 EV, to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Flash Exp. Comp. - 1

Notes About Flash Exp. Comp.

When flash exposure compensation has been set on the optional flash unit the compensation values on the camera and the Speedlight are added.

Noise Reduction Filter

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Noise reduction filter

Set the strength of the noise reduction function that is normally performed when saving images.

Option Description
NR+HighPerforms noise reduction at a level higher than the standard strength.
NR Normal (default setting)Performs noise reduction at the standard strength.
NR-LowPerforms noise reduction at a level lower than the standard strength.

Built-in ND Filter

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Built-in ND filter

When the camera's built-in ND filter is used, the amount of light that enters the camera can be reduced to about one-eighth (equivalent to three steps lower in terms of the exposure value) while shooting. Use in situations such as when overexposure results from the subject being too bright.

Option Description
OnThe ND filter is used to reduce the light.
Off (default setting)The ND filter is not used.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Built-in ND Filter - 1

Effects of the Built-in ND Filter

Using the filter may enable the shooting of subjects that are too bright without overexposing the image. It can also be used in situations such as when you want to slow down the shutter speed at a low aperture value.

For example, at a shutter speed of 1/2000 second with the correct exposure, if the ND filter is used to reduce the light in three steps, the speed can be changed to 1/250 second without changing the aperture value.

Distortion Control

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Distortion control

Option Description
OnThe peripheral distortion that occurs due to the intrinsic characteristics of lenses is corrected. The size of the frame is reduced, as compared to when distortion control is not enabled.
Off (default setting) Distortion is not corrected.

Active D-Lighting

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Active D-Lighting

Details in highlights and shadows are preserved, and the natural contrast that is seen with the naked eye is well reproduced in the image taken. This is particularly effective for shooting scenes with high contrast, such as brightly lit outdoor scenery from a dark room or shaded subjects at a sunny seaside.

Option Description
High
NormalSet the effect level.
Low
OFFOff (default setting)Active D-Lighting is not applied.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Active D-Lighting - 1

Notes About Active D-Lighting

• Additional time is required to record images after shooting.
- The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Active D-Lighting - 1

Active D-Lighting Versus D-Lighting

The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu reduces exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range. The D-Lighting (6-10) option in the playback menu optimizes dynamic range in images captured.

Zoom Memory

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Zoom memory

When the zoom control is moved while pressing the Fn1 button, the zoom position (equivalent to focal length/angle of view in 35mm [135] format) is switched to the positions that have been selected by setting the check box to on in this menu option. The following settings are available: 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm and 200 mm.

  • Select the focal length with the multi selector, and then press the ⓄK button to set the check box to on √ or off.
  • The default setting is on √ for all the check boxes.
    • To finish the setting, press the multi selector ▶.
  • The focal length set in the Startup zoom position is automatically set to on √.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Zoom Memory - 1

Notes About Zoom Operation

  • When more than one focal length has been set, move the zoom control while pressing the Fn1 button to switch to the focal length closest to that before the operation. To switch to a different focal length, release the zoom control and then move it again.
  • Release your finger from the Fn1 button when using digital zoom.

Startup Zoom Position

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Startup zoom position

Set the zoom position (equivalent to focal length/angle of view in 35mm [135] format) for when the camera is turned on.

The following settings are available: 28 mm (default setting), 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm and 200 mm.

M Exposure Preview

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → M exposure preview

Option Description
OnWhen the shutter speed and aperture value combination is changed in M (manual) mode, the brightness of the shooting screen changes accordingly.
Off (default setting)The brightness of the shooting screen does not change.

Focus-coupled Metering

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Focus-coupled metering

Set whether or not to measure the brightness of the subject by giving higher priority to the focus area when AF area mode (6-49) is set to Manual.

Option Description
On (default setting)When Metering (45) is set to Matrix, the brightness is measured with emphasis on the focus area. When Metering is set to Spot, the brightness is measured in the focus area.
OffThe function for measuring the brightness coupled with the selected focus area is disabled.

Commander Mode

Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 → MENU button → P, S, A or M tab (☐13) → Commander mode

Set how the wirelessly-controlled optional flash unit fires when the flash mode (☐59) is set to ⚪CMD (commander mode).

Option Description
Flash modeStandard flash (default setting):The flash unit (Speedlight) fires regardless of how bright the subject is.Slow sync:The flash unit illuminates the main subject and at the same time slow shutter speeds are used to capture the background.Rear-curtain sync:Fill flash fires on the flash unit just before the shutter closes.Red-eye reduction:If the camera detects "red-eye" while saving an image, it reduces the red-eye effect before the image is saved (61).
Flash control modeTTL (default setting):Fill flash fires with the amount of light emitted by all flash units (Speedlights) automatically adjusted according to the shooting conditions.The compensation value is from -3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.Manual:Fill flash fires after adjusting the amount of light emitted by all flash units.Select the flash output from FULL (full flash), M1/2,M1/4,M1/8,M1/16,M1/32,M1/64 and M$1/128.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Commander Mode - 1

More Information

  • See "Using the Commander Mode" (60) for more information.
  • See "Speedlights (External Flash Unit)" (108) for more information.

Using the Commander Mode

When the flash mode (☐59) is set to ⚪CMD (commander mode), you can wirelessly control an off-camera optional flash unit.

  • Set the group and channel settings for the remote flash unit to "Group A" and "3 CH," respectively.
  • Place the flash unit within the range shown in the diagram below.
  • Set up the remote flash unit facing the camera to ensure that the light from the built-in flash will enter the wireless remote sensor window of the remote flash unit. Set up the remote flash unit in a position closer to the subject than the camera.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using the Commander Mode - 1

text_image 50° or less Approx. 5 m (16 ft) or less 30° or less 30° or less 50° or less Approx. 3.5 m (11.5 ft) or less Camera (built-in flash) Approx. 3.5 m (11.5 ft) or less

- The distances shown in the diagram above may vary depending on the surrounding environment.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Using the Commander Mode - 2

Notes About Using Commander Mode

  • In commander mode, the camera's built-in flash emits low-level flashes in order to control the flash unit. Therefore, the built-in flash must always be raised when using commander mode. The remote flash unit fires in accordance with the Commander mode options (59) set.
  • The built-in flash is not usable when it is set to the commander mode.
  • Ensure that light directly from the flash unit or strong reflections do not enter the shooting lens of the camera. It may not be possible to obtain the correct exposure if such light enters the lens.
  • If the light of the remote flash bounces and does not directly light a subject, set the Flash control mode of the Commander mode (59) to Manual in order to adjust the flash output.
  • Aside from monitor preflashes, the camera's built-in flash emits low-level flashes during shooting to match the flash timing of the flash unit. When shooting a subject at close distance, these low-level flashes may be captured on the image. To prevent such adverse effects, use a lower ISO sensitivity or a larger aperture value (50).
  • Refer to the documentation provided with your Speedlight for more information on flash unit settings.

The Playback Menu

See "Editing Still Images" (○9) for information about image editing functions.

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → MENU button (12) → Print order

If you configure print order settings in advance, you can use them with the printing methods listed below.

  • Taking the memory card to a digital photo lab that supports DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) printing.
  • Inserting the memory card into a DPOF-compatible printer's card slot.
  • Connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer (20).

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Select images, and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order) - 1

text_image Print order Select images Delete print order

2 Select images (up to 99) and the number of copies (up to 9) of each.

- Use the multi selector ◀ or rotate it to select images, and use ▲▼ to specify the number of copies to be printed.

- Images selected for printing are indicated by the check mark icon and the numeral indicating the number of copies to be printed. If no copies have been specified for images, the selection is canceled.

  • Move the zoom control toward T (Q) to switch to full-frame playback or W (☐) to switch to thumbnail playback.
  • Press the OK button when setting is complete.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order) - 2

text_image Print selection 1 2 3 TEN Back

3 Select whether or not to print shooting date and shooting information.

  • Select Date and press the OK button to print the shooting date on all images.
  • Select Info and press the ⓄK button to print the shutter speed and aperture value on all images.

- Lastly, select Done and press the OK button to complete the print order.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select whether or not to print shooting date and shooting information. - 1

text_image Print order Done Date Info

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select whether or not to print shooting date and shooting information. - 2

Notes About Printing Shooting Date and Shooting Information

  • Some printers may not be able to print the shooting date and shooting information.
  • Shooting information is not printed when the camera is connected to a printer.
  • The Date and Info settings are reset each time the Print order option is displayed.

- The date printed is that saved when the image was captured.

- For images taken with the Print date (77) option enabled, only the date and time imprinted at the time of shooting are printed, even if the Print order date option is enabled for the images.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Printing Shooting Date and Shooting Information - 1

natural_image Illustration of a woman by a lakeside with a sailboat and mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Printing Shooting Date and Shooting Information - 2

Notes About Print Order

RAW (NRW) images cannot be set for print order. Create a JPEG image using RAW (NRW) processing (15), and then set the JPEG image for print order.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Print Order - 1

Canceling Existing Print Order

Select Delete print order in step 1 of "Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order)" (62).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Canceling Existing Print Order - 1

More Information

See "Printing Images of Size 1:1" (29) for more information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - More Information - 1

Slide Show

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → MENU button (12) → 📋 Slide show

Play back images one by one in an automated "slide show." When movie files (97) are played back in the slide show, only the first frame of each movie is displayed.

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Start and press the ⓄK button.

- The slide show begins. - To change the interval between images, select Frame intvl, press the OK button, and specify the desired interval time before selecting Start.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Start and press the ⓄK button. - 1

text_image Slide show Pause Start Frame intvl 3s Loop

- To repeat the slide show automatically, select Loop and press the Ⓞ button before selecting Start.

- The maximum playback time is up to about 30 minutes even if Loop is enabled.

2 Select End or Restart.

- The screen shown on the right is displayed after the slide show ends or is paused. To exit the show, select □ and then press the OK button. To resume the slide show, select ▶ and then press the OK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select End or Restart. - 1

natural_image Illustration of a woman with shoulder-length hair looking at a lakeside with a sailboat and mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

Operations During Playback

- Use ◀▶ to display the previous/next image. Press and hold to rewind/fast forward.

- Press the Ⓞ button to pause or end the slide show.

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → MENU button ( 12) → Delete

Delete selected images, or all images at one time.

See "Using the Screen for Selecting Images" (☐90) for more information.

Option Description
Erase selected imagesOn the image selection screen, select the images for deletion.·When images where RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are recorded at the same time are selected, the RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are deleted at the same time.·When the key picture of a sequence is selected, all images in the sequence are deleted.
All imagesDelete all images.·This option is not displayed when images in a sequence are displayed in full-frame playback mode.
Entire sequenceThis option is displayed when images in a sequence are displayed in full-frame playback mode.Delete all images in the displayed sequence.
Erase selected NRW imagesOnly RAW (NRW) images are displayed on the image selection screen. Select and delete images.·For images where RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are recorded at the same time, only RAW (NRW) images are deleted.
Erase selected JPEG imagesOnly JPEG images are displayed on the image selection screen. Select and delete images.·For images where RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are recorded at the same time, only JPEG images are deleted.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Operations During Playback - 1

Notes About Deletion

  • Deleted images cannot be recovered. Transfer important images to a computer before deleting them.
  • Images marked with the Ⓞ icon are protected and cannot be deleted (○○66).
  • JPEG is displayed on the image selection screen for images where RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are recorded at the same time.

OnProtect

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → MENU button (12) → On Protect

The camera protects selected images from accidental deletion.

Select images to protect or cancel protection for previously protected images from the image selection screen (90).

Note that formatting the camera's internal memory or the memory card

(85) permanently deletes protected files.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - OnProtect - 1

Rotate Image

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → MENU button (12) → ☑ Rotate image

Specify the orientation in which saved images are displayed during playback. Still images can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or 90 degrees counterclockwise.

Images that were recorded in the "tall" orientation can be rotated up to 180 degrees in either direction.

Select an image from the image selection screen (☐90). When the Rotate image screen is displayed, use the multi selector ◆ or rotate it to rotate the image 90 degrees.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Rotate Image - 1

text_image Rotate image Rotate Back Rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise Rotate image Rotate Back Rotate 90 degrees clockwise

Press the Ⓞ button to finalize display orientation, and save orientation information with the image.

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → select an image → MENU button (12) → ↓ Voice memo

Voice memos can be recorded and attached to images.

Recording Voice Memos

- Press and hold the Ⓞ button to record (up to about 20 seconds).

- Do not touch the microphone.

- During recording, REC and [▶] flash in the monitor.

- The voice memo playback screen is displayed after recording ends. Press the OK button to play back the voice memo.

- Delete the current voice memo before recording a new voice memo.

- [A] is displayed for images with a voice memo when in full-frame playback mode.

- Press the multi selector ◀ before or after recording a voice memo to return to the playback menu.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Recording Voice Memos - 1

natural_image Illustration of a woman with a camera app icon, standing by a lakeside with a sailboat and mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

Playing Voice Memos

Select an image with 📄 displayed before pressing the MENU button.

- Press the OK button to play the voice memo. Press the button again to stop playback.

- Move the zoom control during playback to adjust playback volume.

- Press ◀ before or after playing a voice memo to return to the playback menu.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Playing Voice Memos - 1

natural_image Illustration of a woman by a lakeside with a sailboat and mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

Deleting Voice Memos

Press the 📋 button on the voice memo playback screen. Use ▲▼ to select Yes and press the Ⓞ button.

• To delete a voice memo for a protected image, the Protect setting must first be disabled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Deleting Voice Memos - 1

text_image File will be deleted. OK? Yes No

Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory Card)

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → MENU button ( 12) → Copy

Copy images or movies between the internal memory and a memory card.

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select a destination option to which images are copied and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory Card) - 1

text_image Copy Camera to card Card to camera

2 Select a copy option and press the Ⓞ button.

- If you choose the Selected images option, use the image selection screen to specify images (90).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory Card) - 2

text_image Camera to card Selected images All images

Notes About Copying Images

  • Only files in formats that this camera can record can be copied.
  • When images saved with an Image quality (6-27) setting of RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal are selected, the RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are copied at the same time.
  • Operation is not guaranteed with images captured with another make of camera or that have been modified on a computer.
  • The Print order (62) settings configured for images are not copied.

Notes About Copying Images in a Sequence

  • If you select a key picture of a sequence in Selected images, all images in the sequence are copied.
  • If you press the MENU button while images in a sequence are displayed, only the Card to camera copy option is available. All images in the sequence are copied if you select Current sequence.

Copying to a Memory Card That Contains No Images

When the camera is switched to playback mode, Memory contains no images. is displayed. Press the MENU button to select Copy.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory Card) - 3

Sequence Display Options

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → MENU button (12) → Sequence display options

Select the method used to display images in the sequence (○○7).

Option Description
Individual picturesDisplays each image in a sequence individually. □ is displayed on the playback screen.
Key picture only (default setting)Displays only the key picture for images in a sequence.

Settings are applied to all sequences, and the setting is saved in the camera's memory even if the camera is turned off.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Sequence Display Options - 1

Choose Key Picture

Press the ▶ button ( playback mode) → display a sequence for which you want to change the key picture → MENU button (12) → Choose key picture

Specify a different image in the sequence as the key picture.

- When the key picture selection screen is displayed, select an image (☐90).

The Movie and Movie Custom Setting Menus

Shooting Mode (Movie Custom Setting Only)

Rotate the mode dial to ↗CSM → MENU button → CSM (movie custom setting) tab (☐96) → Shooting mode

Set the standard shooting mode during ▶CSM (movie custom setting) mode.

Option Description
AAperture-priority auto (default setting)Use this mode to shoot subjects clearly with both the foreground and background in focus or to blur the subject's background intentionally (51).
MManualUse this mode to control the exposure according to shooting requirements (51).
Special effectsUse this mode to apply the effects to images during shooting. Select one of the following:• Painting (default setting), Cross process, Soft, Nostalgic sepia, High key, Low key and Selective colorSee 46 for more information on characteristics of each special effect.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Shooting Mode (Movie Custom Setting Only) - 1

Notes About Shooting Mode

The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

Custom Picture Control (Movie Custom Setting Only)

Rotate the mode dial to ↗CSM → MENU button → CSM (movie custom setting) tab (96) → Custom Picture Control

To set Custom Picture Control, see "Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control)" (44).

Autofocus Mode

Rotate the mode dial to ▶ or ▶CSM → MENU button → ▶ (movie) or ▶CSM (movie custom setting) tab (96) → Autofocus mode

Set how the camera focuses when recording movies.

Option Description
AF-S Single AF (default setting)Focus is locked when movie recording starts. Select this option when the distance between the camera and the subject will remain fairly consistent.
AF-F Full-time AFThe camera focuses continuously.Select this option when the distance between the camera and subject will change significantly during recording. The sound of the camera focusing may be heard in the recorded movie. Use of Single AF is recommended to prevent the sound of the camera focusing from interfering with recording.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Autofocus Mode - 1

Notes About Autofocus Mode

  • When an HS movie option is selected in Movie options, the setting is fixed at Single AF.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

Built-in ND Filter (Movie Custom Setting Only)

Rotate the mode dial to ↗CSM → MENU button → CSM (movie custom setting) tab (96) → Built-in ND filter

To set built-in ND filter, see "Built-in ND Filter" (55).

Wind Noise Reduction

Rotate the mode dial to ▶ or ▶CSM → MENU button → ▶ (movie) or CSM (movie custom setting) tab (96) → Wind noise reduction

Option Description
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Wind Noise Reduction - 1Reduces the sound produced when wind passes over the microphone. Other sounds may become difficult to hear during playback.
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Wind Noise Reduction - 2 Off (default setting)Wind noise reduction is not enabled.

The Setup Menu

Welcome Screen

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Welcome screen

Configure the welcome screen that is displayed when you turn on the camera.

Option Description
None (default setting)Does not display the welcome screen.
COOLPIX Displays a welcome screen with the COOLPIX logo.
Select an imageDisplays an image selected for the welcome screen.The image selection screen is displayed. Select an image (90) and press the OK button.Because a copy of the selected image is saved in the camera, it will be displayed when the camera is turned on, even if the original image is deleted.An image cannot be selected if its aspect ratio is different from that of the screen, or if the image size is extremely small after the small picture or crop function is applied.

Time Zone and Date

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Time zone and date

Set the camera clock.

Option Description
Date and timeSelect an item: Press the multi selector (changes between D, M, Y, hour, and minute).Edit the date and time: Press ▲▼. Date and time can also be changed by rotating the multi selector or main command dial.Apply the setting: Select the minute setting and press the Ⓞ button or ▶.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Time Zone and Date - 1
Date formatSelect Year/Month/Day, Month/Day/Year, or Day/Month/Year.
Time zoneSet time zone and daylight saving time.When Travel destination ( ➤) is set after having set the home time zone (▲), the time difference between the travel destination and the home time zone is automatically calculated, and the date and time are saved for the selected region.

Setting the Time Zone

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select Time zone and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Time Zone - 1

text_image Time zone and date 15/11/2013 15:30 London, Casablanca Date and time -- Date format Y/M/D Time zone

2 Select ⬆ Home time zone or ➤ Travel destination and press the Ⓞ button.

• The date and time displayed in the monitor changes depending on whether the home time zone or travel destination is selected.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Time Zone - 2

text_image Time zone Tokyo, Seoul 16/11/2013 0:30 Home time zone Travel destination

3 Press ▶.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Time Zone - 3

text_image Time zone Tokyo, Seoul 16/11/2013 0:30 Home time zone Travel destination

4 Use ◀▶ to select the time zone.

  • The time difference between home and the travel destination is displayed.
  • Press ▲ to enable daylight saving time function, and ⚙ is displayed. Press ▼ to disable the daylight saving time function.
  • Press the OK button to apply the time zone.
  • If the correct time is not displayed for the home or travel destination time zone setting, set the appropriate time in Date and time.

Time difference
NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Time Zone - 4

text_image 10:30 -5:00 New York Toronto Lima MENU Back

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Setting the Time Zone - 5

text_image Time zone New York, Toronto, Lima 15/11/2013 10:30 Home time zone Travel destination

Monitor Settings

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (📖13) → Monitor settings

Option Description
Image reviewOn (default setting): The captured image is displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting and the monitor display returns to the shooting screen.Off: The captured image is not displayed immediately after shooting.Tone level information: Tone level information (11) is displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting.
BrightnessSet the monitor brightness to one of 6 levels.Default setting:3Hi is suitable when very bright light under the open sky makes the monitor difficult to see. Colors may appear different from the actual image.Cannot be set when the viewfinder is used.
Photo infoSet the display options displayed in the monitor (11) during shooting. The following display options can be set for each of Show info and Hide info.Virtual horizon: Displays the virtual horizon for checking whether the camera is horizontal. When the camera is horizontal or vertical, the mark on the virtual horizon display turns green.Histograms: Displays a graph that shows the brightness distribution in the image (16).Framing grid: Displays a boxed guide for framing.Default setting: All hidden (off)To select show or hide, select an option with the multi selector, and then press the OK button to turn the check box on √ or off.After finishing the setting, select Confirm and press the OK button.
Virtual horizon displaySelect Circle (default setting) or Bars when the virtual horizon is set to be displayed in Photo info (16).
Playback/menusSelect which of the monitor and viewfinder is used to display the playback screen or menu screen when the ▶ button or MENU button is pressed during shooting.Monitor priority: Switches to the monitor when the viewfinder has been used for shooting.Monitor or viewfinder (default setting): Either the monitor or viewfinder which had been selected before the ▶ button or MENU button was pressed is continuously used.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Monitor Settings - 1

Notes About Photo Info

  • The histogram is not displayed during movie recording. The virtual horizon is displayed only before recording is started.
  • The virtual horizon is not displayed in the following scene modes. Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait, Food, Panorama and Pet portrait
  • The virtual horizon and histogram may not be displayed when shooting with some of the settings of Smile timer or AF area mode. See 80 for more information.
  • In shooting modes U1, U2 and U3, set Photo info in the specialized menus for U1, U2 and U3 (73, 75).

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Print date

The shooting date and time can be imprinted on the images when shooting, allowing the information to be printed even from printers that do not support date printing (63).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Print Date (Imprinting Date and Time on Images) - 1

natural_image Illustration of a woman by a lakeside with a sailboat and mountains in the background (no text or symbols)
Option Description
DATE DateDate is imprinted on images.
DATE Date and timeDate and time are imprinted on images.
OFF Off (default setting)Date and time are not imprinted on images.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Print Date (Imprinting Date and Time on Images) - 2

Notes About Print Date

  • Imprinted dates form a permanent part of image data and cannot be deleted. The date and time cannot be imprinted on images after they have been captured.
  • The date and time cannot be imprinted in the following situations.

  • When the scene mode is set to Easy panorama or Panorama assist

  • When Image quality (27) is set to RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal
  • When Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected for Continuous (💡46)
  • When shooting movies

- The imprinted date and time may be difficult to read when using a small image size.

Self-timer: After Release

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Self-timer: after release

Set whether or not to cancel the self-timer setting after shooting with self-timer (62).

Option Description
Exit self-timer mode (default setting)Cancels the self-timer setting after shooting.When the self-timer remote control (10s/2s/1s) has been set (106), the setting is changed to the quick-response remote after shooting.When smile timer (63) has been set, the setting is not canceled.
Stay in self-timer modeShooting is continued without canceling the self-timer setting.The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off.

Vibration Reduction

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Vibration reduction

Set to reduce the effects of camera shake while shooting.

Set Vibration reduction to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera during shooting.

Option Description
On (default setting)Vibration reduction is enabled.The camera automatically detects the panning direction and only compensates for vibration caused by camera shake.When the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction only reduces vertical shake. If the camera is panned vertically, vibration reduction only compensates for horizontal shake.
OFFOffVibration reduction is disabled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Vibration Reduction - 1

Notes About Vibration Reduction

• After turning on the camera or after switching from playback mode to shooting mode, wait for the shooting mode screen to be displayed completely before taking images.
- Images displayed in the camera monitor immediately after shooting may be displayed blurry.
- Vibration reduction may be unable to completely eliminate the effects of camera shake in some situations.

AF Assist

Press the MENU button → ⚙ tab (☐13) → AF assist

Enable or disable the AF-assist illuminator which assists autofocus operation.

Option Description
Auto (default setting)The AF-assist illuminator automatically lights up when the subject is dimly lit. The illuminator has a range of about 4.0 m (13 ft) at the maximum wide-angle position and about 2.0 m (6 ft 6 in.) at the maximum telephoto position.Note that for some scene modes or focus areas, the AF-assist illuminator may not light.
Off The AF-assist illuminator does not light.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AF Assist - 1

Notes About the AF-assist Illuminator

In shooting modes U1, U2 and U3, set AF assist in the specialized menu for U1, U2 or U3 (73, 75).

ISO Sensitivity Step Value

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → ISO sensitivity step value

Set the step value of the sensitivity to be set for ISO sensitivity (33) of the quick menu.

Option Description
1 step (default setting)The ISO sensitivity step value is set to 1 step.80, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400)
1/3 stepThe ISO sensitivity step value is set to 1/3 step.80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400)

Digital Zoom

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Digital zoom

Option Description
On (default setting)Digital zoom is enabled.
CropThe zoom ratio is limited within a range in which the image quality does not deteriorate (up to the position of the zoom indicator) (33).• Digital zoom cannot be used in the following situations.- WhenImage sizeis 4000×3000, 3264×2448, 3984×2656, 16:99M 3968×2232 or 1:1 3000×3000- When theMovie optionssetting is 1080★/30p/1080★/25p, 1080★/30p/1080/25p, 480/20/480/100 HS 480/4×, 720/60/720/50 HS 720/2× or 1080/15/1080/25 HS 1080/0.5×- WhenContinuousis set toContinuous H: 120 fps orContinuous H: 60 fps

Off Digital zoom is disabled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Digital Zoom - 1

Notes About Digital Zoom

• Digital zoom cannot be used in the following situations.
- When Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait, Easy panorama in Panorama or Pet portrait is selected in scene mode
- When Zoom exposure is selected in special effects mode
- Digital zoom cannot be used when using certain settings of other functions.
- When digital zoom is in effect, Metering (45) is set to Center-weighted or Spot depending on the magnification of an enlargement.

Zoom Speed

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Zoom speed

Set the zoom operation speed. Slow down the zoom speed to minimize the recording of the zoom operating noise during movie recording.

Option Description
Auto (default setting)During still image shooting, the zoom operates at the Normal speed. During movie recording, the zoom operates at a lower speed than Normal.
NormalDuring both still image shooting and movie recording, the zoom operates at the normal speed. Rotating the zoom control all the way in either direction adjusts the zoom quickly, while moving the control partially adjusts the zoom slowly.
QuietDuring both still image shooting and movie recording, the zoom operates at a lower speed than Normal.

Fixed Aperture

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Fixed aperture

Option Description
OnIn A or M shooting mode, zooming can be performed with minimum changes in the aperture value.When the f-number exceeds the aperture control range at a new zoom position, the aperture value is not fixed.
Off (default setting)The aperture value is not fixed.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Fixed Aperture - 1

More Information

See "Aperture Value (F-number) and Zoom" (☐50) for more information.

Sound Settings

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (📖13) → Sound settings

Option Description
Button soundWhen On (default setting) is selected, the camera produces one beep when operations are performed, two beeps when focus is acquired on the subject, and three beeps when an error occurs. The start-up sound is also produced.• Sounds are disabled when using Pet portrait scene mode.• The start-up sound is not produced when Welcome screen is set to None.
Shutter soundWhen On (default setting) is selected, the shutter sound is produced when the shutter is released.• The shutter sound is not produced when using continuous shooting mode, when recording movies, or when using Pet portrait scene mode.

Record Orientation

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (☐13) → Record orientation

Set whether or not to record the "tall" orientation data on the images that are shot with the camera held in "tall" orientation.

Option Description
Auto (default setting)The “tall” orientation data is recorded on the images when they are shot.WhenRotate tall(884)is set toOn, the images are displayed in “tall” orientation during playback.
Off The “tall” orientation data is not recorded.

- The orientation data can be changed after shooting using Rotate image in the playback menu (66).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Record Orientation - 1

Notes About Recording the "Tall" Orientation Data

  • In Continuous or Auto bracketing mode, all images are recorded with the same orientation data as the first image.
  • Correct orientation data may not be obtained for images recorded with the camera facing up or down.

Rotate Tall

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Rotate tall

Option Description
On (default setting)The images are rotated when the camera is turned in “tall” or landscape orientation during playback. The images on which the “tall” orientation data is recorded are displayed in “tall” orientation.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Rotate Tall - 1
Off The images are not rotated.

Auto Off

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Auto off

Set the amount of time that elapses before the camera enters standby mode (☐27).

You can select 30 s, 1 min (default setting), 5 min, or 30 min.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Auto Off - 1

Notes About Auto Off

- The time that passes before the camera enters standby mode is fixed in the following situations:

  • When a menu is displayed: 3 minutes (when auto off is set to 30 s or 1 min)
  • When the AC Adapter EH-5b is connected: 30 minutes

Format Memory/Format Card

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (☐13) → Format memory/Format card

Use this option to format the internal memory or a memory card.

Formatting the internal memory or memory cards permanently deletes all data. Data that has been deleted cannot be recovered. Make sure to transfer important images to a computer before formatting.

- Do not turn the camera off or open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover during formatting.

Formatting the Internal Memory

Remove the memory card from the camera. The Format memory option is displayed in the setup menu.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Formatting the Internal Memory - 1

text_image Format memory All images will be deleted! OK? Format No

Formatting Memory Cards

Insert a memory card in the camera. The Format card option is displayed in the setup menu.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Formatting Memory Cards - 1

text_image Format card All images will be deleted! OK? Format No

Language

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Language

Select a language for display of camera menus and messages.

TV Settings

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → TV settings

Adjust settings for connection to a TV.

Option Description
Video modeSelect from NTSC and PAL.Both NTSC and PAL are standards for analog color television broadcasting.The available frame rates in Movie options (30) change depending on the setting of the video mode.
HDMISelect a resolution for HDMI output. When Auto (default setting) is selected, the option best suited to the TV to which the camera is connected is automatically selected from 480p, 720p, or 1080i.
HDMI device controlWhen On (default setting) is selected, the HDMI-CEC-compatible TV's remote control can be used to control the camera during playback (19).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - TV Settings - 1

HDMI and HDMI-CEC

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a multimedia interface.

HDMI-CEC (HDMI-Consumer Electronics Control) allows compatible devices to inter-operate.

External Mic Sensitivity

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → External mic sensitivity

Set the external microphone sensitivity to Auto (default setting), High, Medium or Low when recording movies.

When the microphone sensitivity is set to Auto, the camera automatically adjusts the microphone sensitivity.

Customize Command Dials

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Customize command dials

Swap the function of the main command dial for that of the sub-command dial when the exposure is set (49).

- This option is available only when shooting mode is set to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 mode or during movie custom setting mode (when Shooting mode is set to Aperture-priority auto or Manual).

Option Description
No swap (default setting)In P mode, set the flexible program using the main command dial.In S, A or M mode, set the shutter speed using the main command dial and set the aperture value using the sub-command dial.
Swap main and subIn P mode, set the flexible program using the sub-command dial.In S, A or M mode, set the shutter speed using the sub-command dial and set the aperture value using the main command dial.

Command Dial Rotation

Press the MENU button → ♀ tab (13) → Command dial rotation

Change the direction of operation when the command dial is rotated during shooting.

- This option is available only when shooting mode is set to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 mode or during movie custom setting mode (when Shooting mode is set to Aperture-priority auto or Manual).

Option Description
Standard rotation (default setting)For example, in S mode, the shutter speed is set to the low speed side if the main command dial is rotated counterclockwise.
Reverse rotationFor example, in S mode, the shutter speed is set to the high speed side if the main command dial is rotated counterclockwise.

Multi Selector Right Press

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Multi selector right press

Set the function to be performed when the multi selector ▶ is pressed.

Option Description
AF area mode (default setting)The AF area mode (49) setting is displayed when the multi selector ▶ is pressed.
Off The setting is not displayed.

Delete Button Options

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (☐13) → Delete button options

Option Description
Press twice to deletePress the button once more to delete an image while the deletion confirmation message is displayed (37).
Disable second press (default setting)Even if the button is pressed again while the deletion confirmation message is displayed, the image is not deleted.

AE/AF Lock Button

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → AE/AF lock button

Set the function to be performed when the AE-L/AF-L button (☐4) is pressed while shooting.

Option Description
AE/AF lock (default setting)Locks both the focus and exposure while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
AE lock onlyLocks only the exposure while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
AE lock (Hold)Locks the exposure when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. To cancel the lock, press the button again.
AF lock onlyLocks only the focus while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

- See "Focusing During Movie Recording" (93) for more information on the operation when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed during movie recording.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - AE/AF Lock Button - 1

Notes About AE/AF Lock Button Setting

- When the scene mode is Scene auto selector, AF-L (focus locking) using the AE-L/AF-L button is disabled. When the scene mode is Fireworks show, the AE-L/AF-L button cannot be used.

- AE-L (exposure locking) cannot be used when the shooting mode is set to M.

- AF-L (focus locking) cannot be used when focus mode (☐64) is set to MF (manual focus).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About AE/AF Lock Button Setting - 1

More Information

See "Focus Lock" (☐85) for more information.

Fn1 + Shutter Button

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (☐13) → Fn1 + shutter button

Set the function to be performed when the shutter-release button is pressed while pressing the Fn1 (function 1) button (☐4) during shooting.

- This option is available when P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3 is selected for shooting mode.

Option Description
Off (default setting)Shoots without changing the setting.
RAW (NRW)/NORMAL (Image quality) (27)Changes the image quality setting for images to be shot.WhenFineorNormalis set, the setting is changed to RAW (NRW), and when RAW (NRW) is set, it is changed to Normal.The image size is 12M4000×3000.Shoots without changing the setting when RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normalis set.
ISO sensitivity (33)Shoots with ISO sensitivity set to Auto.
White balance (35)Shoots with White balance set toAuto (normal).Cannot be used whenPicture Controlis set to Monochrome.
Picture Control (40)Shoots with COOLPIX Picture Control set toStandard.

Fn1 + Command Dial/Fn1 + Selector Dial

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Fn1 + command dial/Fn1 + selector dial

Set the function to be performed when the command dial or multi selector is rotated while pressing the Fn1 (function 1) button during shooting.

  • Rotating either the main command dial or sub-command dial enables the command dial operation.
  • This option is available when the shooting mode is P, S, A, M, U1, U2, U3 or movie custom setting mode.
Option Description
Off (default setting)No function is set. Operation will be disabled.
Metering (45)Change the setting for metering.
Continuous (46)Change the settings for continuous shooting.
Flash exp. comp. (54)Change the setting for Flash exp. comp.
Active D-Lighting (56)Change the setting for Active D-Lighting.
ISO sensitivity (33)Change the setting for ISO sensitivity.
White balance (35)Change the setting for white balance.• Preset manual measurement and fine adjustment of white balance are not available.
Picture Control (40)Change the setting for COOLPIX Picture Control.• Quick adjust and manual adjust are not available.
Vibration reduction (79)Change the setting for vibration reduction.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Fn1 + Command Dial/Fn1 + Selector Dial - 1

Notes About Fn1 + Command Dial/Fn1 + Selector Dial

Operation is disabled when AE or AF is locked.

Fn1 Guide Display

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Fn1 guide display

Option Description
On (default setting)When the Fn1 (function 1) button is pressed during shooting, guides for the functions assigned to Fn1 + shutter button (6090), Fn1 + command dial and Fn1 + selector dial (6091) are displayed in the monitor.• In the shooting modes or settings during which the Fn1 button cannot be used, will be displayed.
OffEven if the Fn1 button is pressed, guides are not displayed.

Fn2 Button

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Fn2 button

Set the function to be performed when the Fn2 button (☐5) is pressed.

Option Description
Off No function is set. Operation will be disabled.
Show/hide info (default setting)Switches the information displayed in the monitor during shooting and playback (11).
Virtual horizon, View/hide histograms, View/hide framing gridShows or hides the virtual horizon, histogram or framing grid (75) in the monitor during shooting.
Built-in ND filterChange the built-in ND filter (55) setting during shooting.

Customize My Menu

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Customize My Menu

Register frequently used menu items in My Menu (up to 5 items). The settings of the menu items registered in My Menu can be checked and changed in the My tab of the quick menu(only when the shooting mode is set to P, S, A, M, U1, U2 or U3).

The following items can be registered.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Customize My Menu - 1

text_image FINE AUTO AUTO OFF 1 Custom Picture Control 2 Metering 3 Continuous 4 AF area mode 5 Autofocus mode Single
  • Custom Picture Control (💡44)
  • Metering (💡45)
  • Continuous (46)
  • AF area mode (49)
  • Autofocus mode (53)
  • Flash exp. comp. (54)
  • Noise reduction filter (54)
    • Distortion control (55)

• Active D-Lighting (56)
• Vibration reduction (79)
- Digital zoom (81)
- Format memory/Format card (85)
• Built-in ND filter (55)
- Eye-Fi upload (96)
- None (delete)*

* Select to remove an item from My Menu.

Registering into My Menu

1 Use the multi selector ▲▼ to select the menu item and press the ⓄK button.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Registering into My Menu - 1

text_image Customize My Menu 1 Custom Picture Control 2 Metering 3 Continuous 4 AF area mode 5 Autofocus mode

2 Select the menu item to be registered and press the Ⓞ button.

• To finish the setting, press ◀.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Registering into My Menu - 2

text_image Customize My Menu : 1 Custom Picture Control Metering Continuous AF area mode Autofocus mode Flash exp. comp. Noise reduction filter

Reset File Numbering

Press the MENU button → ⚙ tab (☐13) → Reset file numbering

When Yes is selected, the sequential numbering of file numbers is reset

(103). After resetting, a new folder is created and the file number for the next image taken starts with "0001."

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Reset File Numbering - 1

Notes About Reset File Numbering

Reset file numbering cannot be applied when the folder number reaches 999 and there are images in the folder. Insert a new memory card, or format the internal memory/memory card (85).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Reset File Numbering - 1

Folders for Storing Files

Still images, movies and voice memos shot or recorded with this camera are saved in folders of the internal memory/memory card.

  • Sequential numbers are added to folder names in ascending order, starting with "100" and ending with "999" (the folder names are not displayed on the camera).
  • A new folder is created in the following situations.

  • When the number of files in a folder reaches 200

  • When a file in a folder is numbered "9999"
  • When Reset file numbering is performed

- A new folder is created each time a series of images are captured using panorama assist or interval timer shooting, and the images are saved in that folder with file numbers starting with "0001."

Accessory Terminal

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Accessory terminal

Set this option when the optional Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10 or GPS unit (6-105) is attached to the accessory terminal (2).

Option Description
Power supplyWhen set to On (default setting), the WR-R10 or GPS unit works.
Use GPS to set clockWhen the GPS unit is attached, signals from the GPS satellites are used to set the date and time of the camera's internal clock (only when Power supply is set to On). Check the positioning status before setting the clock.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Accessory Terminal - 1

Notes About Use GPS to Set Clock

  • Date/time adjustment by Use GPS to set clock is set according to the time zone set in Time zone and date (28, 73) of the setup menu. Check the time zone before setting Use GPS to set clock.
  • The date/time set using Use GPS to set clock is not as accurate as radio clocks. Use Time zone and date in the setup menu to set the time if it is not accurate in Use GPS to set clock.

Eye-Fi Upload

Press the MENU button → ⚙ tab (☐13) → Eye-Fi upload

Option Description
Enable (default setting)Upload images created by the camera to a preselected destination.
Disable Images are not uploaded.

Notes About Eye-Fi Cards

  • Note that images will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient even if Enable is selected.
  • Remove your Eye-Fi card from the camera where wireless devices are prohibited. Signals may be transmitted even if Disable is selected.
  • Refer to the instruction manual of your Eye-Fi card for more information. In the event of malfunction, contact the card manufacturer.
  • The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.
  • The camera is not compatible with the Endless Memory function. When it is set on a computer, disable the function. If the Endless Memory function is enabled, the number of images taken may not be displayed correctly.
  • Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase. Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices.
  • Leaving the setting as Enable will result in the battery being depleted in a shorter period of time.

Eye-Fi Communication Indicator

The communication status of the Eye-Fi card in the camera can be confirmed in the monitor (14).

• 📋: Eye-Fi upload is set to Disable.
- lights): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.
- (flashes): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• 📞: An error occurred. The camera cannot control the Eye-Fi card.

MF Distance Indicator Units

Press the MENU button → ⚙ tab (☐13) → MF distance indicator units

Set either m (meter) (default setting) or ft (feet) for the unit of gauge displayed when the focus mode is set to manual focus (☐66).

Reverse Indicators

Press the MENU button → ⚙ tab (☐13) → Reverse indicators

Change the +/- display direction of the exposure indicator (51) displayed when shooting mode is M and the indicator displayed for setting bracketing (38).

- Default setting: The – side of the indicators is set to the left and + side is set to the right.

Flash Control

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Flash control

Set whether or not to switch the flash to be used.

Option Description
AUTOAuto (default setting)When the Speedlight (external flash unit) (108) is attached, the Speedlight fires. When the Speedlight is not used, the built-in flash fires.
Optional flashThe built-in flash is always disabled. Only the Speedlight is used.

Reset All

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (📖13) → Reset all

When Reset is selected, the camera's settings are restored to their default values.

  • Some settings, such as Time zone and date or Language, are not reset.
  • User settings that were saved in U1, U2 and U3 of the mode dial are not reset. To reset these settings, use Reset user settings (75).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Reset All - 1

Resetting File Numbering

To reset file numbering to "0001", delete all images saved in the internal memory or on the memory card before selecting Reset all. Reset file numbering can also be used to reset to "0001" (94).

Firmware Version

Press the MENU button → 🎨 tab (13) → Firmware version

View the current camera firmware version.

Error Messages

Refer to the table below if an error message is displayed.

Display Cause/Solution
Battery temperature highThe camera turns off automatically. Wait until the battery has cooled before resuming use.-
The camera will turn off to prevent overheating.The inside of the camera has become hot. The camera turns off automatically. Wait until the camera has cooled before resuming use.-
Memory card is write protected.The write-protect switch is in the "lock" position. Slide the write-protect switch to the "write" position.-
This card cannot be used.An error occurred while accessing the memory card.Use an approved card.Check that the terminals are clean.Confirm that the memory card is correctly inserted.252424
This card cannot be read.
Card is not formatted. Format card?The memory card has not been formatted for use in the camera. Formatting deletes all data saved on the memory card. If you need to keep copies of any images, make sure to select No and save the copies to a computer or other medium before formatting the memory card. Select Yes and press the OK button to format the memory card.24, 5
Not available if Eye-Fi card is locked.The write-protect switch of the Eye-Fi card is in the "lock" position.-
An error occurred while accessing the Eye-Fi card.Check that the terminals are clean.Confirm that the Eye-Fi card is correctly inserted.2424
Out of memory. Delete images or insert a new memory card.37, 98,65,24
Image cannot be saved.An error occurred while saving the image.Insert a new memory card or format the internal memory or memory card.24,85
The camera has run out of file numbers.Insert a new memory card or format the internal memory or memory card.
The image cannot be used for the welcome screen.72
There is insufficient space to save the copy.Delete images from the destination.37
Sound file cannot be saved.A voice memo cannot be attached to this image.• Voice memos cannot be attached to movies.• Select an image captured with this camera.-67
Image cannot be modified.• Select images that support the editing function.• Images captured with cameras other than this camera cannot be edited.9-
Cannot record movie.A time-out error occurred while saving the movie on the memory card.Select a memory card with a faster write speed.25
Cannot reset file numbering.File numbering cannot be reset because the sequential number of a folder has reached the upper limit.Insert a new memory card or format the internal memory or memory card.24,85
Memory contains no images.There are no images in the internal memory or on the memory card.• Remove the memory card from the camera to play back images in the camera's internal memory.• To copy the images saved in the camera's internal memory to the memory card, press the MENU button to select Copy in the playback menu.2468
File contains no image data.The file was not created or edited with this camera.-
This file cannot be played back.The file cannot be viewed on this camera.View the file using a computer or the device used to create or edit this file.
Display Cause/Solution
All images are hidden.There are no images available for a slide show, etc.There are no images that can be displayed on the image selection screen for deletion.-
This image cannot be deleted.The image is protected.Disable protection.66
My Menu can not be changed at current settings.All registered menu items cannot be changed at the current setting.Some functions cannot be used in combination with other menu settings.There is no item that can be set using the current shooting mode.Change the menu item to be registered in My Menu.77-93
Raise the flash.When the scene mode isScene auto selector, you can take an image even if the flash is lowered but the flash will not fire.When the scene mode isNight portraitorBacklightingwith HDRset to Off, you must raise the flash to take an image.4040, 43
Speedlight setting errorRefer to the documentation provided with your Speedlight or wireless Speedlight commander to check the settings.59,108
Lens errorA lens error occurred.Turn the camera off and then on again. If the error persists, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.26
Communications errorAn error occurred while communicating with the printer.Turn the camera off and reconnect the USB cable.20
System errorAn error occurred in the camera's internal circuitry.Turn the camera off, remove and reinsert the battery, and turn the camera on. If the error persists, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.26
Failed to acquire GPS data.The camera clock is not set correctly.Change the location or time and determine the location again.-
Printer error: check printer status.After solving the problem, selectResumeand press theOKbutton to resume printing.*-
Printer error: check paperLoad the specified size of paper, selectResume,and press theOKbutton to resume printing.*-
Printer error: paper jamRemove the jammed paper, selectResume,and press theOKbutton to resume printing.*-
Printer error: out of paperLoad the specified size of paper, selectResume,and press theOKbutton to resume printing.*-
Printer error: check inkThere is a problem with the printer's ink.Check the ink, selectResume,and press theOKbutton to resume printing.*-
Printer error: out of inkReplace the ink cartridge, selectResume,and press theOKbutton to resume printing.*-
Printer error: file corruptThere is a problem with the image file to be printed.SelectCanceland press theOKbutton to cancel printing.-

* See the documentation provided with your printer for further guidance and information.

File Names

Images, movies, or voice memos are assigned file names as follows.

File name: DSCN0001.JPG

(1) (2) (3)

(1) IdentifierNot shown on camera monitor.
DSCNOriginal still images, movies, still images extracted from movies
SSCN Small picture copies
RSCN Cropped copies
FSCNImages created by an image editing function other than crop and small picture, movies created by the movie editing function
(2) File numberAssigned automatically in ascending order, starting with "0001" and ending up with "9999."When a file number reaches "9999," a new folder is created and the next file number returns to "0001."A new folder is created each time a series of images are captured using panorama assist or interval timer shooting, and the images are saved in that folder with file numbers starting with "0001."
(3) ExtensionIndicates file format.
.JPG JPEG still images
.NRW RAW still images
.MOV Movies
.WAVVoice memosIdentifier and file number are the same as the image to which the voice memo is attached.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - File name: DSCN0001.JPG - 1

Notes

When images are shot with an Image quality (27) setting of RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal, the RAW (NRW) and JPEG images that are recorded at the same time are assigned the same identifier and file number. The pair of images is saved in the same folder and is counted as one file.

Optional Accessories

AC adapter/power connectorAC Adapter EH-5b and power connector:When the power connector is inserted into the camera and the AC adapter is connected, the camera can be powered from an electrical outlet. The AC adapter and the power connector are available separately.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Optional Accessories - 1 NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Optional Accessories - 2 NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Optional Accessories - 3Before closing the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover, fully insert the cord of the power connector into the slot in the battery chamber. If part of the cord runs out of the grooves, the cover or cord may be damaged when the cover is closed.Insert the DC plug of the AC Adapter EH-5b into the DC plug connector of the Power Connector EP-5A.
Audio video cable Audio Video Cable EG-CP16
Speedlight (external flash unit), wireless Speedlight commanderSee "Speedlights (External Flash Unit)" (108).
Filter 40.5mm screw-on filter 40.5 NC
Lens hoodLens Hood HN-CP17:Cuts out light which adversely affects the image and protects the lens surface. A 58mm screw-on filter can be attached to the lens hood.NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Optional Accessories - 4
External microphone Stereo Microphone ME-1
Wireless mobile adapterWireless Mobile Adapter WU-1a:When you attach the WU-1a to the USB/audio/video output connector of the camera, the camera can connect via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) connection to smart devices that have the dedicated software installed.You can use your smart device to release the camera's shutter by remote operation or copy images stored on the memory card inserted in the camera to the smart device.Operations other than turning on and off the camera using the camera's controls cannot be performed during remote control operation.This function cannot be used when the Eye-Fi card is inserted into the camera.See our websites, product catalogs, or the documentation provided with the WU-1a for further details.
Remote control*Remote Control ML-L3 (106)
Remote Cord MC-DC2:When attached to the accessory terminal, you can release the shutter using the MC-DC2 instead of pressing the shutter-release button on the camera.
Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10, WR-T10:When the WR-R10 (receiver) is attached to the accessory terminal, you can release the shutter wirelessly from the WR-T10 (transmitter).When using a tripod, attach the camera to the tripod before attaching the WR-R10.When using the WR-R10, first attach it, selectAccessory terminalin the setup menu, and then setPower supply (95) to On.
GPS accessory GPS UnitGP-1 (113)
Hand strap Hand StrapAH-CP1

* Setting a longer Auto off time (84) is recommended when using the remote control function.

Availability may vary with country or region.

See our website or brochures for the latest information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Optional Accessories - 5

Using a Commercially Available Step-up Ring

When a commercially available step-up ring is used, remove the lens ring (☐1) from the camera.

Shooting with Remote Control ML-L3

Use the Remote Control ML-L3 (available separately) (105) to release the shutter. Set Vibration reduction (79) in the setup menu to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.

1 Press the multi selector ◀ (💡).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Press the multi selector ◀ (💡). - 1

text_image OK [+]

2 Select remote control mode and use ▶ to display the setting.

  • Select the remote control setting and press the OK button.
  • 📷: Press the transmission button on the remote control to shoot instantly (quick-response remote).
  • 10s (10 seconds), 2s (2 seconds) and 1s (1 second): Press the transmission button on the remote control to shoot with the selected seconds delay (self-timer remote control).
  • If the OK button is not pressed within a few seconds, the selection will be canceled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Select remote control mode and use ▶ to display the setting. - 1

text_image 10s OFF Remote control

3 Frame the picture.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Frame the picture. - 1

text_image QUAL 1/250 F5.6 [1290] RGB色

4 Aim the transmitter at the infrared receiver on the front of the camera (1) and press the transmission button.

- Press the transmission button from a distance of 5m (16ft) or less. - In the quick-response remote mode, once the subject is in focus, the shutter is released.

- When the time for self-timer is set to 10s (10 seconds) or 2s (2 seconds), the self-timer lamp flashes when the subject is in focus, and then about 1 second before the shutter is released, the lamp stops flashing and remains lit. To stop the self-timer before an image is taken, press the transmission button again.

- In the self-timer remote control mode, the remote control mode is set to 📄 (quick-response remote) when the shutter is released.

Replacing the Battery for Remote Control ML-L3 (3V CR2025 Lithium Battery)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Replacing the Battery for Remote Control ML-L3 (3V CR2025 Lithium Battery) - 1

text_image Diagram illustrating the step-by-step installation of a remote control device, showing component positioning and polarity changes.
  • When changing the remote control battery, make sure that the battery's positive (+) and negative (−) terminals are oriented correctly.
  • Make sure to read and follow the warnings of "For Your Safety" (vii).

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Replacing the Battery for Remote Control ML-L3 (3V CR2025 Lithium Battery) - 2

Notes About the Remote Control

  • The remote control may not function even from a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less when shooting in backlit conditions.
  • The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About the Remote Control - 1

More Information

See "Self-timer: After Release" (78) for more information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - More Information - 1

text_image Diagram illustrating the use of a Nikon digital camera on a tripod, showing its sensor setup and payment interface.

Speedlights (External Flash Unit)

With this camera, various functions are available in combination with the Speedlight (external flash unit) supported by the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) (109). Use the Speedlight when the built-in flash cannot provide sufficient lighting.

The following Speedlights and wireless Speedlight commander can be used for the camera.

SpeedlightsSB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, SB-R200*
Wireless Speedlight commander SU-800

* Speedlight used for remote flash. Attachment Ring SX-1 cannot be mounted on this camera. To use the SB-R200, it must be attached to the Speedlight Stand AS-20.

How to Attach the Speedlight/Wireless Speedlight Commander

  • Do not raise the built-in flash.
  • Remove the accessory shoe cover from the camera.
  • Refer to the documentation provided with your Speedlight/wireless Speedlight commander for more information on how to attach and detach the Speedlight with a locking pin and other details.
  • Attach the accessory shoe cover when the accessory shoe is not in use.
  • Attempting to attach an accessory that does not support this camera may damage the camera and the accessory.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - How to Attach the Speedlight/Wireless Speedlight Commander - 1

text_image Diagram showing assembly of a Nikon DSLR camera with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating assembly steps.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - How to Attach the Speedlight/Wireless Speedlight Commander - 2

Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories

Use only Nikon Speedlights. Flash units of other manufacturers (with voltages over 250 V applied to the camera's X sync contact, or causing short circuit at the accessory shoe contact) could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.

Functions That Can Be Used in Combination with the Speedlight

• SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or SB-600

CLS compatible Speedlight
SB-910 SB-900SB-800SB-700 SB-600
Single flash uniti-TTL i-TTL-BL flash^1
Standard i-TTL flash ^3 ^3 ^3
AA Auto aperture flash √4 ^4 --
A Non-TTL auto flash ^4 ^4 --
GNDistance priority manual flash
M Manual flash
RPT Repeating flash-
Advanced Wireless Lighting (AWL)Master flash unitInstruction to flash unit ^2
i-TTL i-TTL flash
AA Auto aperture flash-
M Manual flash
RPT Repeating flash-
Remote flash uniti-TTL i-TTL flash √ √
AA Auto aperture flash-
M Manual flash
RPT Repeating flash
Transmission of flash color temperature information
Flash mode setting from camera - ---

^1 Not available when metering mode is set to Spot.

2 The remote flash unit can control Group A only.

^3 Can also be set on the Speedlight.

^4 The selection of AA mode and A mode is performed using the custom setting for the Speedlight.

• SU-800, SB-400 or SB-R200

CLS compatible Speedlight
SU-800 SB-400 SB-R200
Single flash uniti-TTL i-TTL-BL flash^1 -√-
Standard i-TTL flash-√-
AA Auto aperture flash---
A Non-TTL auto flash---
GNDistance priority manual flash---
M Manual flash-√3-
RPT Repeating flash---
Advanced Wireless Lighting (AWL)Master flash unitInstruction to flash unit ^2 √--
i-TTL i-TTL flash---
AA Auto aperture flash---
M Manual flash---
RPT Repeating flash---
Remote flash uniti-TTL i-TTL flash - -
AA Auto aperture flash---
M Manual flash--
RPT Repeating flash---
Transmission of flash color temperature information-√-
Flash mode setting from camera - √-

1 Not available when metering mode is set to Spot.

2 The remote flash unit can control Group A only.

3 This setting can be made using the flash mode (59) of this camera. When M\$ (manual) is set, fill flash fires at the flash output that was set. If other flash mode is set, i-TTL Flash is enabled.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Functions That Can Be Used in Combination with the Speedlight - 1

Notes About i-TTL Flash

  • The monitor preflashes are fired to measure the reflecting light from a subject in order to adjust the flash output of the Speedlight.
  • i-TTL-BL flash: The flash output is adjusted with consideration for the balance between a subject and its background light.
  • Standard i-TTL flash: The flash output is adjusted to achieve proper exposure according to the brightness of the main subject without consideration of the background light. This setting is optimal for taking images with emphasis on the main subjects.
  • When shooting using i-TTL flash, set the flash control mode of the Speedlight to i-TTL before taking images (except SB-400).
  • When shooting using SB-700 or SB-400 and if Metering of the camera is set to Matrix or Center-weighted, i-TTL-BL flash is set. If Metering of the camera is set to Spot, Standard i-TTL flash is set.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About i-TTL Flash - 1

Notes About Speedlights

  • This camera does not support Auto FP High-Speed Sync, FV lock, red-eye reduction or AF-assist for multi-area AF when using Speedlights.
  • The power zoom function can be used with Speedlights SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or SB-600 and the zoom head position is automatically set depending on the focal length of the lens.
  • When using Speedlights SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or SB-600, the edges of images shot at ranges less than 2 m (6 ft 7 in.) on the wide-angle zoom position may appear dark. In such cases, use the wide panel.
  • When set to STBY (standby), the Speedlight turns on and off at the same time as the camera. Confirm on the Speedlight that the Ready-light is on.
  • Advanced Wireless Lighting shooting can be performed by setting SB-910, SB-900, SB-800 or SB-700 attached to this camera to master flash, or by setting SU-800 to the Commander mode, and setting SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600 or SB-R200 to remote flash (when shooting with this camera, the remote flash setting is only applicable to Group A).
  • Advanced Wireless Lighting shooting can be performed also by using this camera's built-in flash in Commander mode (only applicable to Group A and fixed at 3 CH) (60, 75, 59).
    • Refer to the documentation provided with your Speedlight for more information.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Speedlights - 1

Notes About Using the Remote Flash Unit

  • Set up the remote flash unit in a position close to the subject from the camera to ensure the light from the Speedlight to enter the sensor window.
  • Aside from monitor preflashes, the master flash unit emits a minute amount of flashes to control the remote flash unit. When shooting a subject at a short distance from the master flash unit, these minute amounts of flashes may cause adverse effects and the proper exposure may not be achieved. To reduce such adverse effects, use the wide panel for the master flash when the master flash unit is directly facing a subject that is being shot at a short distance.

Using the GPS Unit

When the GPS unit (available separately) is attached to the accessory terminal, signals from GPS satellites are received to determine the current position and the position information (latitude and longitude) can be recorded on the images to be shot.

Position information recorded on images can be checked on a map with ViewNX 2 after transferring the images to a computer (104).

How to Attach the GPS Unit

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - How to Attach the GPS Unit - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Device"] -->|USB Drive| B["Camera"]
    B --> C["USB Switch"]
    C --> D["Close-up of Cable"]
    D --> E["Close-up of Cable"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
  • Turn the camera off before attaching the GPS unit.
  • Make sure that the plug is inserted in the correct direction. Inserting the plug in the wrong direction could damage the plug or connector.
    • To use the built-in flash, do not attach the GPS unit to the accessory shoe.

Recording GPS Data on Images

  • Set Power supply of Accessory terminal in the setup menu to On (default setting) (💡95).
    • Signals are received from GPS satellites and positioning starts.
  • When you take an image at a place where positioning is successfully performed, the position information is recorded on the image.
  • Operate in an open-air area when starting to receive signals from GPS satellites.
  • Be aware of your surroundings when positioning.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Recording GPS Data on Images - 1

GPS Reception Indicator

GPS reception can be checked on the shooting screen (14).

  • Signals are being received from four or more satellites and determine position. Position information is recorded on the image.
  • Signals are being received from three satellites and determine position. Position information is recorded on the image.
    • Signals are no longer received from the satellites. If the camera has position information that has been obtained in the last 1 minute, this position information is recorded on the image.
  • Signals cannot be received from the satellites, and positioning is not possible. The position information is not recorded on the image.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - GPS Reception Indicator - 1

Information Recorded on Images

  • The shooting date and time that is displayed when playing back images is determined by the camera's internal clock at the time of shooting. The time obtained by the position information and recorded on images will not be displayed on the camera.
  • Position information for the first frame will be recorded on a series of pictures shot using continuous shooting.
  • Position information cannot be displayed on the camera.
  • The actual place of shooting may differ from the GPS information recorded on the image files due to the accuracy of the position information obtained and a difference in the geodetic system used.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Information Recorded on Images - 1

Notes About Images with Recorded Position Information

An individual may be identified from images that have been recorded with position information. Observe caution when you transfer images recorded with position information to a third party or upload them to a network such as the Internet where the public can view them.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Notes About Images with Recorded Position Information - 1

natural_image Simple icon of a light bulb with rays, enclosed in a rounded square (no text or symbols)

Technical Notes and Index

Caring for the Products....2

The Camera....2

The Battery....3

The Battery Charger....4

Memory Cards....5

Caring for the Camera ...... 📞-6

Cleaning....6

Storage 7

Troubleshooting......8

Specifications....16

Index....22

Caring for the Products

The Camera

To ensure continued enjoyment of this Nikon product, observe the precautions described below in addition to the warnings in "For Your Safety" (vii-ix) when using or storing the device.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - The Camera - 1

Do Not Drop

The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shock or vibration.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Do Not Drop - 1

Handle the Lens and All Moving Parts with Care

Do not apply force to the lens, lens cover, monitor, memory card slot, or battery chamber. These parts are easily damaged. Applying force to the lens cover could result in camera malfunction or damage to the lens. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the display touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Handle the Lens and All Moving Parts with Care - 1

Keep Dry

The device will be damaged if immersed in water or subjected to high humidity.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Keep Dry - 1

Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature

Sudden changes in temperature, such as when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation to form inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or a plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature - 1

Keep away from Strong Magnetic Fields

Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charge or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage data saved on the memory card, or affect the product's internal circuitry.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Keep away from Strong Magnetic Fields - 1

Do Not Point the Lens at Strong Light Sources for Extended Periods

Avoid pointing the lens at the sun or other strong light sources for extended periods when using or storing the camera. Intense light may cause deterioration of the image sensor, producing a white blur effect in photographs.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Do Not Point the Lens at Strong Light Sources for Extended Periods - 1

Turn the Product off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power Source or the Memory Card

Do not remove the battery while the product is on, or while images are being saved or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry.

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Turn the Product off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power Source or the Memory Card - 1

Notes About the Monitor

  • Monitors and electronic viewfinders are constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
  • Images in the monitor may be difficult to see under bright lighting.
  • The monitor is lit by an LED backlight. Should the monitor begin to dim or flicker, contact your Nikon-authorized service representative.

The Battery

  • Be sure to read and follow the warnings in "For Your Safety" (vii-ix) before use.
  • Check the battery level before using the camera and replace or charge the battery if necessary. Do not continue charging once the battery is fully charged as this will result in reduced battery performance. Whenever possible, carry a fully charged spare battery when taking images on important occasions.

- Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0^ (32°F) or above 40^ (104°F).

- Charge the battery indoors with an ambient temperature of 5^ C to 35^ C ( 41^ F to 95^ F) before use.

- When the battery temperature is between 0^ and 10^ (32°F to 50°F) or 45^ to 60^ (113°F to 140°F), the chargeable capacity may decrease.

- The battery is not charged at ambient temperatures below 0^ C ( 32^ F) or above 60^ C ( 140^ F).

- Note that the battery may become hot during use; wait for the battery to cool before charging. Failure to observe these precautions could damage the battery, impair its performance, or prevent it from charging normally.

- On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. If an exhausted battery is used at a low temperature, the camera will not turn on. Be sure that the battery is fully charged before heading outside to take images in cold weather. Keep spare batteries in a warm place and exchange as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.

- Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning. Should the battery terminals become dirty, wipe them off with a clean, dry cloth before use.

  • If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and completely exhaust it before removing it for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with an ambient temperature of 15^ to 25^ (59°F to 77°F). Do not store the battery in hot or extremely cold locations.
  • Always remove the battery from the camera or battery charger when it is not being used. When inserted, minute amounts of current are drawn from the battery even when not in use. This may result in excessive draining of the battery and complete loss of function. Turning the camera on or off while the battery is exhausted can result in reduced battery life.
  • Recharge the battery at least once every six months and completely exhaust it before returning it to storage.
  • After removing the battery from the camera or battery charger, attach the included terminal cover to the battery and store it in a cool place.
  • A marked drop in the time a fully-charged battery retains its charge, when used at room temperature, indicates that the battery needs to be replaced. Purchase a new EN-EL14 battery.
  • Replace the battery when it no longer holds a charge. Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in accordance with local regulations.

The Battery Charger

  • Be sure to read and follow the warnings of "For Your Safety" (vii-ix) thoroughly before using the battery charger.
  • The included battery charger is for use only with a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14.
  • The MH-24 is compatible with AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz electrical outlets. When using in other countries, use a commercially available plug adapter as necessary. For more information about plug adapters, consult your travel agency.

Memory Cards

  • Use only Secure Digital memory cards. See "Approved Memory Cards" (25).
  • Observe the precautions noted in the documentation included with your memory card.
  • Do not affix labels or stickers to the memory card.
  • Do not format the memory card using a computer.
  • The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device into this camera, be sure to format it with this camera. We recommend formatting new memory cards with this camera before using them with this camera.
  • Note that formatting a memory card permanently deletes all images and other data on the memory card. If there is data saved on the memory card that you wish to keep, copy that data to a computer before formatting.
  • If the message Card is not formatted. Format card? is displayed when the camera is turned on, the memory card must be formatted. If there is data on the memory card that you do not want to delete, select No and press the OK button. Copy that data to a computer before formatting. To format the memory card, select Yes.
  • Observe the following precautions while formatting the memory card, saving and deleting images, and copying images to a computer, otherwise data or the memory card itself may be damaged.

  • Do not open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover or remove the memory card or battery.

  • Do not turn off the camera.
  • Do not disconnect the AC adapter.

Caring for the Camera

Cleaning

Lens/viewfinderAvoid touching glass parts with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower (typically a small device with a rubber bulb attached to one end that is pumped to produce a stream of air out the other end). To remove fingerprints or other stains that cannot be removed with a blower, wipe the lens with a soft cloth, using a spiral motion that starts at the center of them and working toward the edges. If this fails, clean the lens using a cloth lightly dampened with commercial lens cleaner.
MonitorRemove dust or lint with a blower. To remove fingerprints and other stains, clean the monitor with a soft, dry cloth, being careful not to apply pressure.
BodyUse a blower to remove dust, dirt, or sand, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or other sandy or dusty environment, wipe off any sand, dust, or salt with a dry cloth lightly dampened with fresh water and dry thoroughly. Note that foreign matter inside the camera could cause damage not covered by the warranty.

Do not use volatile organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, chemical detergents, anticorrosive agents, or anti-fogging agents.

Storage

Turn the camera off when not in use. Be sure that the power-on lamp is off before putting the camera away. Remove the battery if the camera will not be used for an extended period. Do not store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, or in any of the following locations:

  • Next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as televisions or radios
  • Exposed to temperatures below -10^ (14°F) or above 50^ (122°F)
  • Places that are poorly ventilated or subject to humidity of over 60%

To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting the camera away again.

For storing the battery, follow the precautions in "The Battery" (💡3) in "Caring for the Products" (💡2).

Troubleshooting

If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.

Power, Display, Settings Issues

Problem Cause/Solution
The camera is on but does not respond.Wait for recording to end.If the problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery or batteries or, if you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter.Note that although any data currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power source.-26,104
Camera cannot be turned on.The battery is exhausted.The camera cannot be turned on if the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover is open.2622
Camera turns off without warning.The camera automatically turns off to save power (auto off function).The camera or battery have become too cold and cannot operate properly.The inside of the camera has become hot. Leave the camera off until the inside of the camera has cooled, and then try turning it on again.273-
The monitor or viewfinder is blank.The camera is off.The battery is exhausted.The camera has entered standby mode to save power. Press the power switch, shutter-release button or ▶ button, or rotate the mode dial.You cannot turn on both the monitor and viewfinder at the same time. It may take a while to switch between the monitor and viewfinder.The camera and computer are connected via a USB cable.The camera and TV are connected via an audio video cable or HDMI cable.Interval timer shooting in progress.262627-102,106102,1847
Monitor is hard to see.The ambient light is too bright. Move to a darker place or use the viewfinder.Adjust the monitor brightness.The monitor is dirty. Clean the monitor.1099,756
Image in the viewfinder is difficult to see.Adjust the viewfinder using the diopter adjustment control.10
Date and time of recording are not correct.If the camera clock has not been set, the “Date not set” indicator flashes during shooting and movie recording. Images and movies saved before the clock is set are dated “00/00/0000 00:00” or “01/01/2013 00:00” respectively. Set the correct time and date from the Time zone and date option in the setup menu.The camera clock is not as accurate as ordinary watches or clocks. Periodically compare the time of the camera clock with that of a more accurate timepiece and reset as required.28, 99,7399,73
No information displayed in monitor.Shooting and photo information may be hidden. After confirming that the Fn2 button setting is set to Show/hide info, press the Fn2 button until information is displayed.11, 101,92
Print date not available.Time zone and date has not been set in the setup menu.28, 99,73
Date not imprinted on images even when Print date is enabled.The current shooting mode does not support Print date.A function that restricts the print date is enabled.The date cannot be imprinted on movies.99,777-
Screen for setting time zone and date is displayed when camera is turned on.The clock battery is exhausted; all settings were restored to their default values.28, 29
Camera settings reset.
Reset file numbering cannot be done.Although a new folder is created in the internal memory or on the memory card by resetting file numbering, etc., if the sequential number of a folder name (which is not displayed on the camera) reaches the upper limit ("999"), reset is not possible. Change the memory card, or format the internal memory/memory card.101,94
Camera becomes hot.The camera may become hot when used for an extended period of time to shoot movies or send images using an Eye-Fi card, or when used in a hot environment; this is not a malfunction.-
Camera makes sound.When Autofocus mode is set to Full-time AF or while in some shooting modes, the camera may produce an audible focusing sound.74, 96

Shooting Issues

Problem Cause/Solution
Cannot switch to shooting mode.Disconnect the HDMI cable or USB cable.102, 106, 18, 20
No image captured when the shutter-release button is pressed.When the camera is in playback mode, press thebutton or shutter-release button.When menus are displayed, press theMENUbutton.The battery is exhausted.When the scene mode isNight portraitorBacklightingwith HDRset to Off, raise the flash.If the flash mode icon flashes when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the flash is charging.When using the Speedlight, refer to the documentation provided with the Speedlight to check the settings.When shooting using Advanced Wireless Lighting photography, set the group setting to Group A.When using the built-in flash as the commander, set the channel of the flash unit to 3 CH.When the flash setting is enabled for a group other than Group A, disable the flash setting.36122640, 43, 5959108
Camera cannot focus.The subject is too close. Try shooting using theScene auto selectororClose-upscene mode, or the close range only/macro close-up focus mode.Incorrect focus mode setting. Check or change the setting.The subject is hard to focus on.SetAF assistin the setup menu toAuto.Subject is not in focus area when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.The focus mode is set toMF(manual focus).Turn the camera off and then on again.40, 41,64, 6564, 658499,8034, 7364, 6626
Colored stripes appear in the monitor when shooting.Colored stripes may appear when shooting subjects with repeating patterns (such as window blinds); this is not a malfunction.The colored stripes will not appear in captured images or recorded movies. However, when usingContinuousH: 120 fpsorHS 480/4x, the colored stripes may be seen in the captured images and recorded movies.-
Images are blurred.Use the flash.Enable vibration reduction.UseBSS(Best Shot Selector) ofContinuousin the shooting menu.Use a tripod to stabilize the camera when shooting (using the self-timer at the same time is more effective).59997362
Bright specks appear in images captured with flash.The flash is reflecting off particles in the air. Set the flash mode setting to(off).59
Flash does not fire.The flash mode is set to(off).A shooting mode where the flash cannot fire is selected.A function that restricts the flash is enabled.The built-in flash does not fire when an external flash unit (optional) is used.When shooting using Advanced Wireless Lighting photography, set the group setting to Group A.When using the built-in flash as the commander, set the channel of the remote flash unit to 3 CH.See the documentation provided with your Speedlight (external flash unit).596777108108
Digital zoom cannot be used.A function that restricts digital zoom is enabled.Digital zoomis set toOfforCropin the setup menu.Digital zoom cannot be used in the following situations.-WhenScene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait, Easy panoramain Panorama or Pet portraitis selected in scene mode-WhenZoom exposureis selected in special effects modeWhenDigital zoomis set toCropin the setup menu, digital zoom cannot be used in the following situations.-WhenImage sizeis 12M 4000×3000, 8M 3264×2448, 32 3984×2656, 169 9M 3968×2232 or 1:1 3000×3000-WhenMovie optionsis 1080 1080★/30p/ 1080 1080★/25p, 1080 1080/30p/ 1080 1080/25p, 480 / 480 HS 480/4×, 720 / 720 HS 720/2× or 1080 / 1080 HS 1080/0.5×-WhenContinuousis set toContinuous H:120 fps orContinuous H: 60 fps7799,81394699,818182983073,46
Imagestizenot available.A function that restricts theImage sizeoption is enabled.When the scene mode is set toEasy panoramain Panorama, the image size is fixed.7744
No sound when shutter is released.Offis selected forSound settings >Shutter soundin the setup menu. No sound is produced with some shooting modes and settings, even whenOnis selected.77,100,83
AF-assist illuminator does not light.Offis selected for theAF assistoption in the setup menu. AF-assist illuminator may not light depending on the position of the focus area or the current scene mode, even whenAutois selected.99,80
Images appear smeared.The lens is dirty. Clean the lens.6
Colors are unnatural.White balance is not adjusted properly.42,72,835
Randomly spaced bright pixels ("noise") appear in image.The subject is dark, and the shutter speed is too slow or ISO sensitivity is too high. Noise can be reduced by:Using the flash.Specifying a lower ISO sensitivity setting.5972,833
Images are too dark(underexposed).The flash mode is set to (off).The flash window is blocked.The subject is beyond the range of the flash.Adjust exposure compensation.Increase ISO sensitivity.The subject is backlit. Raise the flash, and set the scene mode Backlighting with HDR set to Off or set the flash mode setting to (fill flash).On is selected for Built-in ND filter in the shooting menu.5932596972,3343, 5974
Images are too bright(overexposed).Adjust exposure compensation.Use the Built-in ND filter setting in the shooting menu.6974,55
Unexpected results when flash set to (auto with red-eye reduction).When taking images with (auto with red-eye reduction) or fill flash with red-eye reduction in Night portrait scene mode, In-Camera Red-Eye Fix may be applied to areas not affected by red-eye in rare cases. Use any scene mode other than Night portrait, and change the flash mode to any setting other than (auto with red-eye reduction) and try taking an image again.40, 59
Skin tones are not softened.In some shooting conditions, facial skin tones may not be softened.For images containing 4 or more faces, try using Skin softening in the playback menu.8488,11
Saving images takes time.It may take more time to save images in the following situations.When the noise reduction function is in operationWhen the flash mode is set to (auto with red-eye reduction)When taking images in the following scene modes.- Hand-held in Night landscape- HDR set to other than Off in Backlighting- Easy panorama in PanoramaContinuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fpsWhen using smile timer while shootingWhen using Active D-Lighting while shootingWhen Image quality is set to RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal-60414344Set to466374,5627
A ring-shaped belt or rainbow-colored stripe appears in the monitor or images.When shooting with backlighting or when a very strong light source (such as sunlight) is in the frame, a ring-shaped belt or rainbow-colored stripe (ghosting) may occur.Change the position of the light source, or frame the image so that the light source does not enter the frame, and try again.-
Cannot select a setting/Selected setting is disabled.Certain menu items are unavailable depending on the shooting mode. Menu items that cannot be selected are displayed in gray.A function that restricts the selected function is enabled.12-

Playback Issues

Problem Cause/Solution
File cannot be played back.This camera may not be able to play back images saved with another make or model of digital camera.This camera cannot play back RAW (NRW) images or movies captured or recorded with another make or model of digital camera.This camera may not be able to play back data edited on a computer.File cannot be played back during interval timer shooting.- - -73,47
Cannot zoom in on image.Playback zoom cannot be used with movies, small pictures, or images that have been cropped to a size of 320 × 240 or smaller.This camera may not be able to zoom in on images captured with another make or model of digital camera.- -
Cannot record voice memo.Voice memos cannot be attached to movies.Voice memos cannot be attached to images taken using Easy panorama.Voice memos cannot be attached to images captured with other cameras. Voice memos attached to images using another camera cannot be played back on this camera.--88,67
Cannot edit image.Some images cannot be edited. Images that have already been edited may not be edited again.There is not enough free space in the internal memory or on the memory card.This camera is unable to edit images captured with other cameras.Editing functions used for images are not available for movies.44,9-90,9-
Images are not displayed on TV.Video mode or HDMI is not correctly set in the TV settings setup menu.The cables are connected to the HDMI mini connector and to the USB/audio/video output connector simultaneously.The memory card contains no images. Replace the memory card. Remove the memory card to play back images from the internal memory.100,86102,106,1824
Nikon Transfer 2 does not start when camera is connected to a computer.The camera is off.The battery is exhausted.The USB cable is not correctly connected.The camera is not recognized by the computer.Confirm system requirements.The computer is not set to start Nikon Transfer 2 automatically. For more information about Nikon Transfer 2, refer to help information contained in ViewNX 2.2626102,106-104106
Images to be printed are not displayed.The memory card contains no images. Replace the memory card.Remove the memory card to print images from the internal memory.2425
Cannot select paper size with camera.The camera cannot be used to select the paper size in the following situations, even when printing from a PictBridge-compatible printer. Use the printer to select the paper size.The printer does not support the paper sizes specified by the camera.The printer automatically selects the paper size.21,22-

Specifications

Nikon COOLPIX P7800 Digital Camera

Type Compact digital camera

Number of effective pixels

12.2 million

Image sensor 1/1.7-in. type CMOS; approx. 12.76 million total pixels

Lens NIKKOR lens with 7.1× optical zoom

Focal length

6.0-42.8 mm (angle of view equivalent to that of 28-200 mm lens in 35mm [135] format)

f/-number f/2-4

Construction 13 elements in 10 groups (2 ED lens elements)

Digital zoom magnification

Still pictures: Up to 4× (angle of view equivalent to that of approx. 800 mm lens in 35mm [135] format)

Movies: Up to 2× (angle of view equivalent to that of approx. 400 mm lens in 35mm [135] format)

Vibration reduction Lens shift

Autofocus (AF) Contrast-detect AF

Focus range

- [W]: Approx. 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.) - ∞,
[T]: Approx. 80 cm (2 ft 8 in.) - ∞

- Macro close-up mode: Approx. 2 cm (0.8 in.) (at a wide-angle zoom position) - ∞ (All distances measured from center of front surface of lens)

Focus-area selection

Face priority, auto (9-area automatic selection), center (wide, normal), manual with 99 focus areas, subject tracking, target finding AF

Viewfinder

Electronic viewfinder, 0.5 cm (0.2-in.) approx. 921k-dot LCD with the diopter adjustment function (-3 - +1 m^-1)

Frame coverage (shooting mode)

Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to actual picture)

Frame coverage ( playback mode)

Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to actual picture)

Monitor

7.5 cm (3-in.), approx. 921k-dot (RGBW), wide viewing angle TFT LCD with anti-reflection coating and 6-level brightness adjustment, vari-angle TFT LCD

Frame coverage (shooting mode)

Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to actual picture)

Frame coverage ( playback mode)

Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to actual picture)

Storage
MediaInternal memory (approx. 86 MB)SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card
File system DCF, Exif 2.3 and DPOF compliant
File formatsStill pictures: JPEG, RAW (NRW) (Nikon's own format)Sound files (voice memo): WAVMovies: MOV (Video: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Audio: AAC stereo)
Image size (pixels)12 M 4000×3000 8 M 3264×24484 M 2272×1704 2 M 1600×1200VGA 640×480 3:2 3984×265616:9 9M 3968×2232 1:1 3000×3000
ISO sensitivity(Standard output sensitivity)ISO 80 - 1600ISO 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400) (available when using P, S, A or M mode)
Exposure
Metering modeMatrix, center-weighted, or spot. Also when AF areamode is set to Manual, the AF area can be coupled to the metering range using Focus-coupled metering.
Exposure controlProgrammed auto exposure with flexible program, shutter-priority auto, aperture-priority auto, manual, exposure bracketing (Tv, Av, Sv) enabled, exposure compensation (in steps of 1/3 EV in the range of +/-3.0 EV for still pictures and +/-2.0 EV for movies) enabled
Shutter Mechanical and CMOS electronic shutter
Speed1/4000 * - 1 s1/4000 * - 60 s (when ISO sensitivity is set to 80 - 400 in M mode)* When the aperture value is set to f/4.5 - f/8 (wide-angle position) or the value is set to f/7.1 - f/8 (telephoto zoom position)
Aperture Electronically-controlled 7-blade iris diaphragm
Range13 steps of 1/3 EV (W) (A, M mode)
Self-timer Can be selected from 10 s, 2 s and 1 s
Built-in flash
Range (approx.) (ISO sensitivity: Auto)[W]: 0.5 - 10 m (1 ft 8 in. - 32 ft)[T]: 0.5 - 5.5 m (1 ft 8 in. - 18 ft)
Flash controlTTL auto flash with monitor preflashes; manual flash control available
Flash exposure compensationIn steps of 1/3 EV in the range between -2 and +2 EV
Accessory shoeISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting Systemi-TTL flash control support in combination with Nikon Creative Lighting System-compatible Speedlights (only Standard i-TTL flash control is supported during spot metering mode).Flash Color Information Communication is supported.Advanced Wireless Lighting is supported by setting SB-910, SB-900, SB-800 or SB-700 to master flash or by setting SU-800 to the Commander mode (the remote flash setting is only applicable to Group A).Advanced Wireless Lighting is supported by setting the built-in flash to the Commander mode (only applicable to Group A and fixed at 3 CH).
Interface Hi-Speed USB
Data transfer protocolMTP, PTP
Video output Can be selected from NTSC and PAL
HDMI output Can be selected from Auto, 480p, 720p, and 1080i
I/O terminalAudio/video output; digital I/O (USB)HDMI mini connector (Type C) (HDMI output)External microphone connector (stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter), plug-in power type)Accessory terminal
Supported languagesArabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian, Polish, Portuguese (European and Brazilian), Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil, Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
Power sourcesOne Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 (included)AC Adapter EH-5b (used in combination with the Power Connector EP-5A) (available separately)
Battery life ^1
Still pictures Approx. 350 shots when using EN-EL14
Movie recording (actual battery life for recording) ^2 Approx. 1 h 15 min when recording in NTSC mode using EN-EL14Approx. 1 h 20 min when recording in PAL mode using EN-EL14
Tripod socket 1/4 (ISO 1222)
Dimensions(W × H × D)Approx. 118.5 × 77.5 × 50.4 mm (4.7 × 3.1 × 2.0 in.) (excluding projections)
WeightApprox. 399 g (14.1 oz) (including battery and SD memory card)

Operating environment

Temperature 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F) Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)

  • Unless otherwise stated, all figures assume a fully-charged battery and an ambient temperature of 23 ± 3^ ( 73.4 ± 5.4^ ) as specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
    1 Battery life may vary depending on conditions of use, such as the interval between shots or the length of time that menus and images are displayed.
    2 Individual movie files cannot exceed 4 GB in size or 29 minutes in length. Recording may end before this limit is reached if camera temperature becomes elevated.

Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14

Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Rated capacity DC 7.4 V, 1030 mAh

Operating temperature 0^ C - 40^ C ( 32^ F - 104^ F)

Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)

Weight Approx. 48 g (1.7 oz) (excluding terminal cover)

Battery Charger MH-24

Rated input AC 100 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A max.

Rated output DC 8.4 V, 0.9 A

Supported rechargeable battery

Charging time

Operating temperature 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F)

Dimensions (W × H × D)

Weight

Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14

Approx. 1 hour and 30 minutes when no charge remains

40^ (32°F - 104°F)

Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm ( 2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.) (excluding plug adapter)

For Argentina: Approx. 70 × 68 × 104 mm ( 2.8 × 2.7 × 4.1 in.)

Approx. 89 g (3.1 oz) (excluding plug adapter)

For Argentina: Approx. 125 g (4.5 oz)

NIKON Coolpix P7800 - Battery Charger MH-24 - 1

Specifications

  • Nikon will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
  • The appearance of this product and its specifications are subject to change without notice.

AVC Patent Portfolio License

This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC standard ("AVC video") and/or (ii) decode AVC video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.

See http://www.mpegla.com.

FreeType License (FreeType2)

Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The FreeType Project (http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

MIT License (HarfBuzz)

Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The HarfBuzz Project (http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.

Trademark Information

  • Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
    • Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
  • Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.
  • SDXC, SDHC and SD Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
  • PictBridge is a trademark.
  • HDMI, HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

HDMI

  • Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
  • All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Index

Symbols

AE/AF-L 6

AE-L AE-L/AF-L button.... 4, 85

[+] AF area mode... 58, 73, 📞49

A Aperture-priority auto mode 49, 51

OK Apply selection button 6

Auto mode 30, 38

Delete button...... 37, 98, 100,

8, 67, 88

Flash mode 58, 59

Flash pop-up control...... 59

Focus mode.... 58, 64

Fn1 Function 1 button ..... 4, 74, 100, 🎨57, 🎨90, 🎨91,

92

Fn2 Function 2 button 5, 7, 11, 101, 📐92

M Manual mode 49, 51

MENU Menu button .... 12, 73, 88, 96, 99

|□| Monitor button 10

CSM Movie custom setting mode ... 91

Movie mode.... 91

▶ Playback button.... 5, 6, 36, 97

Playback zoom 86

P Programmed auto mode .... 49, 51

Quick menu button ..... 70, 95

SCENE Scene mode.... 39

Self-timer/Smile timer/Remote control 58, 62, 63, 99,

78, 106

S Shutter-priority auto mode 49, 51

EFFECTS Special effects mode.... 46

T (Telephoto) 33

Thumbnail display...... 87

U1, U2 and U3 User settings modes.... 55

W (Wide-angle) 33

JPG....103

.MOV 103

.NRW 103

.WAV 103

A

AC adapter.... 102, 📞104

Accessory shoe.... 1, 📞108

Accessory Shoe Cover.... 1, 📞108

Accessory terminal ..... 2, 101, 📞95, 📞113

Active D-Lighting ...... 74, 📞56

AE/AF lock button ... 85, 100, Ⓞ89

AF area mode...... 58, 73, 📞49

AF assist.... 99, 📞80

Aperture value.... 49

Aperture-priority auto mode..... 49, 51

Audio video cable .... 103, 🎨18, 🎨104

Audio/video-in jack.... 18

Auto bracketing..... 70, 72, 📞38

Auto flash 60

Auto off.... 27, 100, 📞84

Auto with red-eye reduction..... 60, 61

Autofocus...... 65, 74, 84, 96,

53, 71

Autofocus mode ...... 65, 74, 96, 📞53, 📞71

B

Backlighting 43

Battery 20, 22, 📋-18

Battery charger 20, 📋-19

Battery level indicator.... 26

Battery-chamber/memory card slot cover 22, 24

Best Shot Selector...... 42, 📞46

Black and white copy □...... 42

Black border.... 89, 📞14

Brightness.... 99, 📞75

BSS.... 42, 📞46

Built-in ND filter..... 74, 97, 📐55

Button sound.... 83

C

Calendar display 87

Choose key picture...... 89, 📞69

Close range only.... 65

Close-up 41

CLS....108

Color temperature.... 36

Command dial.... 3, 6, 49

Command dial rotation... 100, 87

Commander mode... 60, 75, 📞59

Computer.... 103, 106

Continuous 73, 📞46

Contrast.... 42

COOLPIX Custom Picture Control ....73, 96, 📞44

COOLPIX Picture Control .... 70, 72, 95, 📞40

Copy....89, 📞68

Crop 86, 17

Custom Picture Control ....73, 96, 📞44

Customize command dials .... 100, 📞87

Customize My Menu .... 101, 📞93

D

Date and time...... 28, 99, 📞73

Daylight saving time ..... 28, 📞74

Delete 37, 88, 98,

8, 65, 67

Delete button options..... 100, 🔊88

Digital zoom.... 33, 99, 📞81

Diopter adjustment control...... 10

Direct Print.... 103, 📞20

Distortion control...... 74, 📞55

D-Lighting.... 88, 📞10

DPOF printing..... 24

DSCN....103

E

Easy panorama.... 44, 📞2

Editing movies.... 25

Editing still images......

Exposure compensation.... 69

Exposure compensation dial...... 69

Exposure mode 49

Extension 103

External flash unit..... 59, 108

External mic sensitivity .... 100, 📞86

External microphone...... 104

Extracting still images...... 📞26

Eye-Fi upload 101, 📞96

Eyelet for camera strap 8

F

Face detection 83

Face priority 49

Fast motion movies..... 🎨31, 🎨32

File name 103

Fill flash.... 60

Filter effects ..... 88, 📞12, 📞42

Fireworks show 42

Firmware version...... 101, 📞98

Fixed aperture.... 99, 📞82

Flash 58, 59

Flash control.... 101, 📞97

Flash control mode.... 59

Flash exp. comp..... 74, 📞54

Flash mode 58, 59

Flash off.... 60

Fn1 + command dial.... 4, 100, 🔔91

Fn1 + selector dial ... 4, 101, 📞91

Fn1 + shutter button.... 4, 100, Ⓞ90

Fn1 guide display... 4, 101, 📞92

Fn2 button 101, 📞92

Focal length .... 74, 75, 📞57, 🌿16

Focus..... 34, 76, 82, 93, 📞49, 📞53, 📞71

Focus area .... 16, 34, 45, 82, 📐49

Focus indicator.... 15, 34

Focus lock....85

Focus mode.... 58, 64

Focus-coupled metering.... 75, 📞58

Food 42

Format..... 24, 100, 🔊85

Format memory cards ..... 24, 100, 📞85

Format the internal memory 100, 85

Framing grid.... 16, 📞75

FSCN....103

Full-frame playback 18, 36, 86, 87

Full-time AF ....74, 96, 📞53, 📞71

Functions that cannot be used simultaneously.... 77

G GPS unit.... 105, 113

H HDMI .... 86 HDMI device control .... 86 HDMI mini connector .... 18 HDR .... 43 High-speed continuous .... 47 Histogram.... 19, 99, 75 HS movie.... 31, 32

! Identifier....103 Image copy....89, 68 Image quality....70, 72, 27 Image selection screen....90 Image sharpening....42 Image size....70, 72, 29 Infinity....65 Initial monitor display....76 Internal memory indicator....26 Interval timer shooting....47 ISO sensitivity....70, 72, 95, 33 ISO sensitivity step value....99, 80

L Language.... 100, 📞85 Lens.... 📞-6, 📞-16 Lens cap .... 8 Lens hood .... 📞104 Lens ring.... 1, 📞105 Li-ion rechargeable battery .... 20, 22, 📞-19

M

M exposure preview..... 74, 📞58

Macro close-up....65

Main command dial ...... 3, 6, 49

Manual flash 60

Manual focus 65, 66

Manual mode 49, 51

Memory capacity...... 26, 91, 92

Memory card.... 24, 25

Memory card slot 24

Metering 73, 📞45

MF distance indicator units 101, 97

Microphone.... 91, 📞67

Minimum shutter speed...... 🎨33

Mode dial 30

Monitor.... 9, 11, 14, 📋-6

Monitor settings 99, 75

Movie and movie custom setting menus 96, 70

Movie custom setting mode ..... 91

Movie length....92

Movie mode.... 91

Movie options 95, 📞30

Movie playback 97

Movie recording 91

Movie recording time remaining.... 91

Multi selector 3, 6, 58

Multi selector right press.... 100, 📞88

Multi-shot 16....46

Museum 42

My Menu 72, 101, 93

N

Night landscape 41

Night portrait 40

Nikon Creative Lighting System 108, 18

Noise reduction filter..... 74, 📞54

Number of exposures remaining 26, 28

O

Optical zoom.... 33

Optional accessories...... 104

P

Panorama assist.... 44, 📞5

Panorama □ 44

Party/indoor 41

Pet portrait 45

Photo info.... 75, 99, 📞75

PictBridge 103, 🎨20

Picture Control ... 70, 72, 95, 📐40

Playback 36, 97, 📞67

Playback menu.... 88

Playback mode.... 36

Playback zoom....86

Playback/menus.... 75

Power 26, 28

Power connector.... 104

Power supply 95

Power switch/power-on lamp..... 2

Preset manual....37

Pressing halfway 4, 34, 35

Print..... 20, 21, 22

Print date 99, 77

Print order 88, 62

Print order date option...... 63

Printer 102, 📞20

Programmed auto mode ..... 49, 51

Protect.... 88, 📞66

Q

Quick adjust.... 42

Quick menu...... 70, 95, 📞27

Quick retouch.... 88, 📞10

R

RAW (NRW) images...... 27

RAW (NRW) processing.... 89, 📞15

Rear-curtain sync.... 60

Rechargeable battery 20

Record orientation ..... 100, 📐83

Remote control

..... 58, 📞105, 📞106, 📞107

Reset all 101, 📞98

Reset file numbering.... 101, 🔗94

Reset user settings 57

Reverse indicators...... 101, 📞97

Rotary multi selector.... 2 , 3, 6, 58

Rotate image 88, 📞66

Rotate tall 100, 84

RSCN....103

S

Saturation.... 42

Save user settings 55

Scene auto selector 🏠 40

Scene mode 39

Selecting images.... 90

Self-timer.... 58, 62, 76

Self-timer lamp 62, 63

Self-timer: after release.... 99, 📞78

Sequence...... 37, 📞7, 📞68

Sequence display options 89, 69

Setup menu.... 99, 📞72

Shooting.... 30

Shooting information...... 11, 14

Shooting menu ...... 73, 📞44

Shooting mode

31, 75, 96, 70

Shutter sound.... 83

Shutter speed 49, 53

Shutter-priority auto mode.... 49, 51

Shutter-release button.... 4, 7, 34, 35

Single 73, 📞46

Single AF.... 74, 96, 📞53, 📞71

Skin softening...... 84, 88, 📞11

Slide show.... 88, 📞64

Slow motion movies.... 🎨31, 🎨32

Slow sync....60

Small picture.... 88, 📐13

Smile timer 58, 63

Sound settings ...... 100, 🔊83

Special effects mode...... 46

Specialized menu for U1, U2 or U3 55, 75

Speedlight....108

Sports 40

SSCN 103

Startup zoom position.... 74, 📞57

Straighten.... 89, 📞15

Sub-command dial...... 3, 6, 49

Subject tracking ..... 🎨50, 🎨51

Switching among tabs.... 13

T

Target finding AF...... 82, 📞51

Telephoto 33

Thumbnail display 87

Time difference.... 74

Time zone.... 28, 📞74

Time zone and date ... 28, 99, 📞73

Tone level.... 19

Tone level information

11, 19, 75

Toning....43

TV 102, 📄18

TV settings 100, 86

U

USB cable ...... 103, 106, 📞20

USB/audio/video output connector

.... 102, 106, 📞18, 📞20

Use GPS to set clock ...... 🎨95

User settings modes 55

V

Vibration reduction...... 99, 📞79

Video mode.... 86

View grid.... 41

Viewfinder.... 10, 32, 📋-6

ViewNX 2....104

Virtual horizon...... 16, 99, 📞75

Virtual horizon display ... 76, 📐75

Voice memo....88, 📞67

Volume 97, 667

W

Welcome screen...... 99, 📞72

White balance.... 70, 72, 95, 📞35

Wide-angle.... 33

Wind noise reduction.... 97, 📞72

Wireless mobile adapter..... 105

Z

Zoom 33

Zoom control 6, 33

Zoom memory ...... 74, 📞57

Zoom speed.... 99, 📞82

No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : NIKON

Model : Coolpix P7800

Category : Camera